texlive[46852] Master/texmf-dist: biblatex-oxref (4mar18)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Mon Mar 5 23:20:02 CET 2018
Revision: 46852
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=46852
Author: karl
Date: 2018-03-05 23:20:02 +0100 (Mon, 05 Mar 2018)
Log Message:
-----------
biblatex-oxref (4mar18)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/Makefile 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@
.PHONY: source clean distclean inst uninst install uninstall zip ctan
-all: $(NAME).pdf $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf $(STY3)-doc.pdf $(STY4)-doc.pdf clean
+all: $(NAME).pdf $(STY1)-doc.pdf $(STY2)-doc.pdf $(STY3)-doc.pdf $(STY4)-doc.pdf
@exit 0
source $(NAME).bbx american-$(NAME).lbx british-$(NAME).lbx english-$(NAME).lbx $(STY1)-doc.tex $(STY1).bbx $(STY1).cbx $(STY1).dbx $(STY2)-doc.tex $(STY2).bbx $(STY2).cbx $(STY2).dbx $(STY3)-doc.tex $(STY3).bbx $(STY3).cbx $(STY3).dbx $(STY4)-doc.tex $(STY4).bbx $(STY4).cbx $(STY4).dbx: $(NAME).dtx
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\ProvidesFile{oxalph-doc.tex}
[\Version\space Alphabetic biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxalph,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -137,6 +137,8 @@
\DeclareSourcemap{%
\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
\map[overwrite=true]{%
+ \pertype{legislation}
+ \pertype{legal}
\step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
}%
}%
@@ -265,25 +267,25 @@
The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
- By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+ By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{literal}
means no special handling is used.
\item\docValue{long}
- will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+ will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
in the bibliography.
\item\docValue{short}
- will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+ will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
in the bibliography.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+ Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
\end{docKey}
@@ -308,32 +310,42 @@
Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+ This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+ (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{slash}
- separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+ separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
\item\docValue{colon}
- separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+ separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
\item\docValue{comma}
- separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+ separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
\item\docValue{parens}
- sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+ sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
\begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
- Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+ Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the \enquote{normal} position.
The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
- If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+ If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. It can also be set on a per-type basis.
\end{docKey}
\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
- Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+ Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{nonodate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Suppresses the printing of the \code{nodate} localization string when an entry is missing a recognizable date. It can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. It is automatically set to \val{true} for entries with a \code{sortyear}, on the assumption that the date has been given in a non-date field (e.g.\@ the number of a standard).
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
\end{docKey}
@@ -347,6 +359,11 @@
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+ Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+ while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -358,11 +375,6 @@
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
- This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -399,7 +411,7 @@
Code used in bibliography file.
\end{tcolorbox}
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
to other styles, are in amber:
\begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -471,36 +483,18 @@
For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
- \begin{itemize}\firmlist
- \item suppbook
- \item booklet
- \item suppcollection
- \item patent
- \item suppperiodical
- \item artwork
- \item commentary
- \item letter
- \item performance
- \item standard
- \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
-
You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
as well.
@@ -514,17 +508,18 @@
Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
-\begin{egcite}{}
+\begin{egcite}%
+{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelalpha}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelalpha}: 72]}
Test \parencites%
[93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
[72]{hankinson1989gba}
\end{egcite}
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
\subsection{Missing attribution}
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -566,7 +561,7 @@
\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
}
@@ -620,7 +615,7 @@
\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
- Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+ Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
\subsection{Pseudonyms}
@@ -736,7 +731,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
@@ -878,10 +873,10 @@
For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
- This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+ The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger>
@@ -898,12 +893,31 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+ \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+ \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+Otherwise, if you don't supply a suitable date, it will be replaced with the
+localization string \code{nodate}. If you don't want this behaviour, you can
+suppress it with the \key{nonodate} option, which can be set globally or on a
+per-type or per-entry basis.
+
\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
@@ -976,7 +990,9 @@
\end{bibexbox}
\begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
+<NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
{li.etal2013flh}
+Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@article{li.etal2013flh,
@@ -1186,7 +1202,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
@@ -1235,11 +1251,53 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+ author = {Alexander Ball},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2015},
+ journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {i-v},
+ doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+ title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+ date = {2006},
+ note = {Editorial},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\section{Reviews}
\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger>
@@ -1407,7 +1465,7 @@
Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1765,7 +1823,7 @@
\subsection{Reprints}
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
\tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
@@ -1805,7 +1863,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
\tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
@@ -2187,6 +2245,13 @@
\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
{gill1987intro}
@@ -2196,6 +2261,7 @@
@suppbook{gill1987intro,
author = {Roma Gill},
title = {introduction},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
volume = {1},
origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2205,6 +2271,34 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+ author = {Robert Atwan},
+ title = {foreword},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ address = {Boston},
+ booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+ date = {2000},
+ editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+ publisher = {Houghton},
+ pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
@@ -2500,8 +2594,14 @@
\section{Reports with a type or series}
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+ series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+ separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+ separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+ type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
+
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
{opcs1979amt}
Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables: The Registrar-General's Decennial Supplement for England and Wales 1969–1973}, Series DS, No.~3 (London)
@@ -2518,8 +2618,6 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
-
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
{opcs1979pnc}
Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
@@ -2553,6 +2651,25 @@
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+ institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
\section{Theses}
\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).}
@@ -2572,12 +2689,192 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
-\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution).}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution.}
+\end{itemize}
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+ title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+ date = {1921},
+ howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+ location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{lloyds2015m,
+ author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+ title = {Mortgages},
+ date = {2015},
+ howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+ author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+ title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+ date = {1986-02-04},
+ origdate = {1980-10-23},
+ type = {patentus},
+ number = {4,586,960},
+ location = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+ author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+ and Taverkere, Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+ title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {patentus},
+ holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+ number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{pm1981opa,
+ author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+ title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+ origdate = {1981-01-07},
+ date = {1985-05-15},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{hideki1992qmc,
+ author = {U. Hideki},
+ title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+ type = {patentjp},
+ number = {152932/92},
+ date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+ you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+ for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{bs5605:1990,
+ sortyear = {1990},
+ title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+ number = {BS~5605:1990},
+ shorthand = {BS5605},
+ organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+ title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+ editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+ Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+ date = {2017-12-14},
+ type = {W3C Recommendation},
+ organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+ url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+ urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+ author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+ title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+ date = {1990-05},
+ organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+ series = {Request for Comments},
+ type = {Internet Standard},
+ number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+ doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
@@ -2874,7 +3171,7 @@
\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
- You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+ You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
@@ -2957,7 +3254,7 @@
\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
@@ -3065,10 +3362,15 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+ put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+ organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+ \code{location} for where it is.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
{clarkeNDeci}
@@ -3079,12 +3381,14 @@
author = {M. Clarke},
title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
titleaddon = {poster},
- organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+ institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
urldate = {2013-11-05}}
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
{ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3093,7 +3397,9 @@
\begin{Verbatim}
@image{ibwNDcgs,
title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
- note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+ type = {stained glass window},
+ venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+ location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
urldate = {2013-11-10}}
@@ -3100,11 +3406,121 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{davinci1480mr,
+ author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+ title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+ type = {oil on canvas},
+ note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+ year = {1480s},
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+ institution = {Louvre},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{gormley1998an,
+ author = {Anthony Gormley},
+ title = {Angel of the {North}},
+ date = {1998},
+ type = {sculpture},
+ location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{rodin1882k,
+ author = {Auguste Rodin},
+ title = {The Kiss},
+ date = {1882},
+ type = {marble},
+ institution = {Musée Rodin},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+ was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+ are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+ (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+ use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+ specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+ to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+ \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+ for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{ashton1937wb,
+ author = {Frederick Ashton},
+ origdate = {1937},
+ title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+ venue = {Royal Opera House},
+ location = {London},
+ date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{lord2007dc,
+ author = {Jon Lord},
+ date = {2007-10-20},
+ title = {Durham Concerto},
+ editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+ editortype = {performer},
+ editora = {Mischa Damev},
+ editoratype = {conductor},
+ venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+ location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{judge1995mnd,
+ options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+ author = {William Shakespeare},
+ title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+ editor = {Ian Judge},
+ editortype = {director},
+ date = {1995-02-26},
+ venue = {Theatre Royal},
+ location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
\section{Website articles}
@@ -3216,6 +3632,8 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
@@ -3222,8 +3640,6 @@
it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
{wp2013oup}
@@ -3293,7 +3709,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
{oup2015tweet}
@@ -3414,7 +3830,7 @@
\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
\val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
- The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+ The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
}
@@ -3504,6 +3920,7 @@
\textcite[13]{rvg2004}
\end{egcite}
+
\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3627,7 +4044,7 @@
The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
- Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+ Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3647,7 +4064,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
@@ -3885,7 +4302,6 @@
@legal{refugees,
entrysubtype = {piltreaty},
title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees},
- shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22},
pagination = {article},
volume = {189},
@@ -3968,7 +4384,7 @@
it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
@@ -4082,7 +4498,7 @@
\section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
@@ -4101,7 +4517,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
{smithMS23116}
-Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+Smith, F. (1912–7), travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@unpublished{smithMS23116,
@@ -4136,7 +4552,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
{chaundlerMS288}
-Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+Chaundler, T. (n.d.), \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{chaundlerMS288,
@@ -4151,7 +4567,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
{exchequerE311}
-exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+exchequer accounts (1798), Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{exchequerE311,
@@ -4165,7 +4581,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
{blcBOX19d}
-Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes (1949), 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{blcBOX19d,
@@ -4180,7 +4596,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
{bodMSrawl-d520}
-Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+Bodleian Library (n.d.), Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520,
@@ -4214,6 +4630,52 @@
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*\textdagger>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author (2001), 2 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{anon2001pl,
+ title = {Personal letter to the author},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*\textdagger>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+Ritter, R. M. (2001), \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@), \url{ogs at ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{ritter2001rp,
+ author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ title = {Revised proofs},
+ howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+ date = {2001-08-01},
+ url = {ogs at ritter.org.uk},
+ urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
\end{document}
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\ProvidesFile{oxnotes-doc.tex}
[\Version\space Footnote-based biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnotes,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -134,6 +134,15 @@
{\multicitedelim}
{\usebibmacro{postnote}\finentrypunct}
\makeatother
+\DeclareSourcemap{%
+ \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+ \map[overwrite=true]{%
+ \pernottype{legslation}
+ \pernottype{legal}
+ \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
+ }%
+ }%
+}
\hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
\usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
@@ -258,25 +267,25 @@
The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
- By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+ By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{literal}
means no special handling is used.
\item\docValue{long}
- will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+ will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
\item\docValue{short}
- will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+ will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+ Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
\end{docKey}
@@ -301,17 +310,23 @@
Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+ This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+ (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{slash}
- separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+ separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
\item\docValue{colon}
- separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+ separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
\item\docValue{comma}
- separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+ separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
\item\docValue{parens}
- sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+ sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
@@ -318,10 +333,11 @@
\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
- Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+ Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
\end{docKey}
@@ -338,6 +354,11 @@
Prints initial author or editor names in bibliography entries in small capitals.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+ Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+ while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -349,11 +370,6 @@
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
- This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -390,7 +406,7 @@
Code used in bibliography file.
\end{tcolorbox}
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
to other styles, are in amber:
\begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -459,36 +475,18 @@
For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
- \begin{itemize}\firmlist
- \item suppbook
- \item booklet
- \item suppcollection
- \item patent
- \item suppperiodical
- \item artwork
- \item commentary
- \item letter
- \item performance
- \item standard
- \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
-
You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
as well.
@@ -516,7 +514,7 @@
\end{egcite}
\addtocategory{hidden}{cobban}
-Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations ‘ibid.\@’, ‘op.\@ cit.\@’, ‘loc.\@ cit.\@’, and ‘id.\@’ and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations \enquote{ibid.\@}, \enquote{op.\@ cit.\@}, \enquote{loc.\@ cit.\@}, and \enquote{id.\@} and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\usepackage[bibstyle=oxnotes,citestyle=verbose-trad1]{biblatex}
@@ -523,12 +521,12 @@
\end{tcblisting}
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
\subsection{Missing attribution}
-Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under ‘Anonymous’ (or ‘Anon.\@’ in the latter case) in the bibliography.
+Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under \enquote{Anonymous} (or \enquote{Anon.\@} in the latter case) in the bibliography.
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
Doing this will automatically suppress the printing of the anonymous author in notes.
}
@@ -572,8 +570,8 @@
\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to add the prefix ‘Pseudo-’ before the name in notes, and
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to add the prefix \enquote{Pseudo-} before the name in notes, and
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to work with single-part names
@@ -629,7 +627,7 @@
\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
- Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+ Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
\subsection{Pseudonyms}
@@ -746,7 +744,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
@@ -888,10 +886,10 @@
For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
- This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+ The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.9>
@@ -908,12 +906,26 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+ \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+ \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
@@ -1207,7 +1219,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
@@ -1233,11 +1245,53 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+ author = {Alexander Ball},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2015},
+ journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {i-v},
+ doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+ title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+ date = {2006},
+ note = {Editorial},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\section{Reviews}
\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.4.4>
@@ -1402,7 +1456,7 @@
Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1764,7 +1818,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get \enquote{revised edition}. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get \enquote{revised and enlarged edition}}
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
{gibbon1686dfs}
@@ -1783,7 +1837,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after \enquote{rev. edn.} in the above reference; this may be an error.}
\subsection{Republications}
@@ -1795,7 +1849,7 @@
\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).}
\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
-\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses \enquote{originally published} instead of \enquote{first published}. This is because \enquote{originally} is more common among the available examples.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -2241,6 +2295,13 @@
\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.6*>
{gill1987intro}
@@ -2250,6 +2311,7 @@
@suppbook{gill1987intro,
author = {Roma Gill},
title = {introduction},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
volume = {1},
origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2259,6 +2321,34 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+ author = {Robert Atwan},
+ title = {foreword},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ address = {Boston},
+ booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+ date = {2000},
+ editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+ publisher = {Houghton},
+ pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
@@ -2542,9 +2632,34 @@
\section{Reports with a type or series}
-\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+ series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+ separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+ separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+ type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+ institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
\section{Theses}
\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution, Year).}
@@ -2564,12 +2679,191 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
-\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution, Year).}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution, Year.}
+\end{itemize}
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+ title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+ date = {1921},
+ howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+ location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{lloyds2015m,
+ author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+ title = {Mortgages},
+ date = {2015},
+ howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+ author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+ title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+ date = {1986-02-04},
+ origdate = {1980-10-23},
+ type = {patentus},
+ number = {4,586,960},
+ location = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+ author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+ and Taverkere, Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+ title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {patentus},
+ holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+ number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{pm1981opa,
+ author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+ title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+ origdate = {1981-01-07},
+ date = {1985-05-15},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{hideki1992qmc,
+ author = {U. Hideki},
+ title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+ type = {patentjp},
+ number = {152932/92},
+ date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+ you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+ for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{bs5605:1990,
+ sortyear = {1990},
+ title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+ number = {BS~5605:1990},
+ organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+ title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+ editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+ Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+ date = {2017-12-14},
+ type = {W3C Recommendation},
+ organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+ url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+ urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+ author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+ title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+ date = {1990-05},
+ organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+ series = {Request for Comments},
+ type = {Internet Standard},
+ number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+ doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
@@ -2866,7 +3160,7 @@
\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
- You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+ You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.14.2>
@@ -2949,7 +3243,7 @@
\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
@@ -3057,10 +3351,15 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+ put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+ organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+ \code{location} for where it is.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5>
{clarkeNDeci}
@@ -3071,12 +3370,14 @@
author = {M. Clarke},
title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
titleaddon = {poster},
- organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+ institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
urldate = {2013-11-05}}
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5>
{ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3085,7 +3386,9 @@
\begin{Verbatim}
@image{ibwNDcgs,
title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
- note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+ type = {stained glass window},
+ venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+ location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
urldate = {2013-11-10}}
@@ -3092,11 +3395,121 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{davinci1480mr,
+ author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+ title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+ type = {oil on canvas},
+ note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+ year = {1480s},
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+ institution = {Louvre},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{gormley1998an,
+ author = {Anthony Gormley},
+ title = {Angel of the {North}},
+ date = {1998},
+ type = {sculpture},
+ location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{rodin1882k,
+ author = {Auguste Rodin},
+ title = {The Kiss},
+ date = {1882},
+ type = {marble},
+ institution = {Musée Rodin},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+ was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+ are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+ (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+ use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+ specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+ to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+ \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+ for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{ashton1937wb,
+ author = {Frederick Ashton},
+ origdate = {1937},
+ title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+ venue = {Royal Opera House},
+ location = {London},
+ date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{lord2007dc,
+ author = {Jon Lord},
+ date = {2007-10-20},
+ title = {Durham Concerto},
+ editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+ editortype = {performer},
+ editora = {Mischa Damev},
+ editoratype = {conductor},
+ venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+ location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{judge1995mnd,
+ options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+ author = {William Shakespeare},
+ title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+ editor = {Ian Judge},
+ editortype = {director},
+ date = {1995-02-26},
+ venue = {Theatre Royal},
+ location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
\section{Website articles}
@@ -3208,6 +3621,8 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
@@ -3214,8 +3629,6 @@
it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5>
{wp2013oup}
@@ -3285,7 +3698,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
{oup2015tweet}
@@ -3406,7 +3819,7 @@
\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
\val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
- The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+ The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
}
@@ -3496,6 +3909,7 @@
Test\footcite[13]{rvg2004}
\end{egcite}
+
\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3619,7 +4033,7 @@
The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
- Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+ Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3639,7 +4053,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
@@ -3961,7 +4375,7 @@
it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
@@ -4075,7 +4489,7 @@
\section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
@@ -4207,6 +4621,52 @@
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author, 2 May 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{anon2001pl,
+ title = {Personal letter to the author},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+R. M. Ritter, \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@ 2001), \url{ogs at ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{ritter2001rp,
+ author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ title = {Revised proofs},
+ howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+ date = {2001-08-01},
+ url = {ogs at ritter.org.uk},
+ urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
\end{document}
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\ProvidesFile{oxnum-doc.tex}
[\Version\space Numeric biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxnum,scnames,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -265,25 +265,25 @@
The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
- By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+ By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{literal}
means no special handling is used.
\item\docValue{long}
- will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+ will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
in the bibliography.
\item\docValue{short}
- will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+ will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
in the bibliography.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+ Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
\end{docKey}
@@ -308,17 +308,23 @@
Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+ This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+ (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{slash}
- separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+ separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
\item\docValue{colon}
- separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+ separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
\item\docValue{comma}
- separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+ separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
\item\docValue{parens}
- sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+ sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
@@ -325,10 +331,11 @@
\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
- Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+ Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
\end{docKey}
@@ -345,6 +352,11 @@
Prints initial author or editor names in bibliography entries in small capitals.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+ Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+ while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -356,11 +368,6 @@
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
- This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -397,7 +404,7 @@
Code used in bibliography file.
\end{tcolorbox}
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
to other styles, are in amber:
\begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -466,36 +473,18 @@
For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
- \begin{itemize}\firmlist
- \item suppbook
- \item booklet
- \item suppcollection
- \item patent
- \item suppperiodical
- \item artwork
- \item commentary
- \item letter
- \item performance
- \item standard
- \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
-
You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
as well.
@@ -509,17 +498,18 @@
Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
-\begin{egcite}{}
+\begin{egcite}%
+{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelnumber}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelnumber}: 72]}
Test \parencites%
[93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
[72]{hankinson1989gba}
\end{egcite}
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
\subsection{Missing attribution}
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -561,7 +551,7 @@
\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
}
@@ -615,7 +605,7 @@
\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
- Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+ Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
\subsection{Pseudonyms}
@@ -731,7 +721,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
@@ -873,10 +863,10 @@
For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
- This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+ The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.9>
@@ -893,12 +883,26 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+ \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+ \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
@@ -971,7 +975,9 @@
\end{bibexbox}
\begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
+<NHR \S18.8.5*>
{li.etal2013flh}
+Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11 (2013), e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@article{li.etal2013flh,
@@ -1190,7 +1196,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
@@ -1216,11 +1222,53 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+ author = {Alexander Ball},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2015},
+ journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {i-v},
+ doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+ title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+ date = {2006},
+ note = {Editorial},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\section{Reviews}
\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.4.4>
@@ -1385,7 +1433,7 @@
Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1745,7 +1793,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get \enquote{revised edition}. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get \enquote{revised and enlarged edition}}
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
{gibbon1686dfs}
@@ -1764,7 +1812,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after \enquote{rev. edn.} in the above reference; this may be an error.}
\subsection{Republications}
@@ -1776,7 +1824,7 @@
\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year) (\lit{originally pub.} Year).}
\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
-\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses \enquote{originally published} instead of \enquote{first published}. This is because \enquote{originally} is more common among the available examples.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -2193,6 +2241,13 @@
\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.6*>
{gill1987intro}
@@ -2202,6 +2257,7 @@
@suppbook{gill1987intro,
author = {Roma Gill},
title = {introduction},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
volume = {1},
origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2211,6 +2267,34 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+ author = {Robert Atwan},
+ title = {foreword},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ address = {Boston},
+ booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+ date = {2000},
+ editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+ publisher = {Houghton},
+ pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
@@ -2494,9 +2578,34 @@
\section{Reports with a type or series}
-\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+ series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+ separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+ separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+ type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+ institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
\section{Theses}
\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution, Year).}
@@ -2516,12 +2625,191 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
-\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution, Year).}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution, Year.}
+\end{itemize}
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+ title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+ date = {1921},
+ howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+ location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{lloyds2015m,
+ author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+ title = {Mortgages},
+ date = {2015},
+ howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+ author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+ title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+ date = {1986-02-04},
+ origdate = {1980-10-23},
+ type = {patentus},
+ number = {4,586,960},
+ location = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+ author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+ and Taverkere, Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+ title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {patentus},
+ holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+ number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{pm1981opa,
+ author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+ title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+ origdate = {1981-01-07},
+ date = {1985-05-15},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{hideki1992qmc,
+ author = {U. Hideki},
+ title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+ type = {patentjp},
+ number = {152932/92},
+ date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+ you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+ for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{bs5605:1990,
+ sortyear = {1990},
+ title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+ number = {BS~5605:1990},
+ organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+ title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+ editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+ Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+ date = {2017-12-14},
+ type = {W3C Recommendation},
+ organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+ url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+ urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+ author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+ title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+ date = {1990-05},
+ organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+ series = {Request for Comments},
+ type = {Internet Standard},
+ number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+ doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
@@ -2818,7 +3106,7 @@
\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
- You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+ You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.14.2>
@@ -2901,7 +3189,7 @@
\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
@@ -3009,10 +3297,15 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+ put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+ organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+ \code{location} for where it is.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5>
{clarkeNDeci}
@@ -3023,12 +3316,14 @@
author = {M. Clarke},
title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
titleaddon = {poster},
- organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+ institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
urldate = {2013-11-05}}
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5>
{ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3037,7 +3332,9 @@
\begin{Verbatim}
@image{ibwNDcgs,
title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
- note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+ type = {stained glass window},
+ venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+ location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
urldate = {2013-11-10}}
@@ -3044,11 +3341,121 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{davinci1480mr,
+ author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+ title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+ type = {oil on canvas},
+ note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+ year = {1480s},
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+ institution = {Louvre},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{gormley1998an,
+ author = {Anthony Gormley},
+ title = {Angel of the {North}},
+ date = {1998},
+ type = {sculpture},
+ location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{rodin1882k,
+ author = {Auguste Rodin},
+ title = {The Kiss},
+ date = {1882},
+ type = {marble},
+ institution = {Musée Rodin},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+ was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+ are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+ (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+ use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+ specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+ to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+ \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+ for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{ashton1937wb,
+ author = {Frederick Ashton},
+ origdate = {1937},
+ title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+ venue = {Royal Opera House},
+ location = {London},
+ date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{lord2007dc,
+ author = {Jon Lord},
+ date = {2007-10-20},
+ title = {Durham Concerto},
+ editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+ editortype = {performer},
+ editora = {Mischa Damev},
+ editoratype = {conductor},
+ venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+ location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{judge1995mnd,
+ options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+ author = {William Shakespeare},
+ title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+ editor = {Ian Judge},
+ editortype = {director},
+ date = {1995-02-26},
+ venue = {Theatre Royal},
+ location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
\section{Website articles}
@@ -3160,6 +3567,8 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
@@ -3166,8 +3575,6 @@
it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5>
{wp2013oup}
@@ -3237,7 +3644,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
{oup2015tweet}
@@ -3358,7 +3765,7 @@
\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
\val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
- The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+ The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
}
@@ -3448,6 +3855,7 @@
\textcite[13]{rvg2004}
\end{egcite}
+
\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3571,7 +3979,7 @@
The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
- Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+ Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3591,7 +3999,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
@@ -3909,7 +4317,7 @@
it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
@@ -4023,7 +4431,7 @@
\section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
@@ -4155,6 +4563,52 @@
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author, 2 May 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{anon2001pl,
+ title = {Personal letter to the author},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+R. M. Ritter, \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@ 2001), \url{ogs at ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{ritter2001rp,
+ author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ title = {Revised proofs},
+ howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+ date = {2001-08-01},
+ url = {ogs at ritter.org.uk},
+ urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
\end{document}
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bib 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
@reference{ritter2002ogs,
- author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ editor = {R. M. Ritter},
+ editortype= {editorcm},
title = {The {Oxford} Guide to Style},
date = {2002},
publisher = {Oxford University Press},
@@ -344,6 +345,23 @@
journaltitle = {Philosophy and Phenomenological Research},
url = {http://cogprints.org/5780/1/ECSRAP.F07.pdf},
pubstate = {inpress}}
+ at suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+ author = {Alexander Ball},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2015},
+ journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {i-v},
+ doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+ at suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+ title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+ date = {2006},
+ note = {Editorial},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1-2}}
@review{dean1995rpb,
author = {J. Dean},
related = {basiron1994mel},
@@ -816,6 +834,7 @@
@suppbook{gill1987intro,
author = {Roma Gill},
title = {introduction},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
volume = {1},
origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -822,6 +841,16 @@
origdate = {1987},
edition = {reprint},
date = {2001}}
+ at suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+ author = {Robert Atwan},
+ title = {foreword},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ address = {Boston},
+ booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+ date = {2000},
+ editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+ publisher = {Houghton},
+ pages = {x-xvi}}
@proceedings{icp1975pic,
title = {Proceedings of the {XIV} {International} {Congress} of {Papyrologists}},
subtitle = {{Oxford}, 24--31 {July} 1974},
@@ -989,6 +1018,70 @@
type = {Ph.D. diss.},
institution = {University of Chicago},
date = {1970}}
+ at booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+ title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+ date = {1921},
+ howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+ location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+ at booklet{lloyds2015m,
+ author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+ title = {Mortgages},
+ date = {2015},
+ howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+ at patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+ author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+ title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+ date = {1986-02-04},
+ origdate = {1980-10-23},
+ type = {patentus},
+ number = {4,586,960},
+ location = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+ at patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+ author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+ and Taverkere, Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+ title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {patentus},
+ holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+ number = {6177575}}
+ at patent{pm1981opa,
+ author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+ title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+ origdate = {1981-01-07},
+ date = {1985-05-15},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ number = {EP0021165}}
+ at patent{hideki1992qmc,
+ author = {U. Hideki},
+ title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+ type = {patentjp},
+ number = {152932/92},
+ date = {1992-05-20}}
+ at standard{bs5605:1990,
+ sortyear = {1990},
+ title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+ number = {BS~5605:1990},
+ shorthand = {BS5605},
+ organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+ at standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+ title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+ editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+ Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+ date = {2017-12-14},
+ type = {W3C Recommendation},
+ organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+ url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+ urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+ at standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+ author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+ title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+ date = {1990-05},
+ organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+ series = {Request for Comments},
+ type = {Internet Standard},
+ number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+ doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
@music{carter1991fsq,
author = {Elliott Carter},
title = {The Four String Quartets},
@@ -1171,15 +1264,65 @@
author = {M. Clarke},
title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
titleaddon = {poster},
- organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+ institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
urldate = {2013-11-05}}
@image{ibwNDcgs,
title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
- note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+ type = {stained glass window},
+ venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+ location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
urldate = {2013-11-10}}
+ at artwork{davinci1480mr,
+ author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+ title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+ type = {oil on canvas},
+ note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+ year = {1480s},
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+ institution = {Louvre},
+ location = {Paris}}
+ at artwork{gormley1998an,
+ author = {Anthony Gormley},
+ title = {Angel of the {North}},
+ date = {1998},
+ type = {sculpture},
+ location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+ at artwork{rodin1882k,
+ author = {Auguste Rodin},
+ title = {The Kiss},
+ date = {1882},
+ type = {marble},
+ institution = {Musée Rodin},
+ location = {Paris}}
+ at performance{ashton1937wb,
+ author = {Frederick Ashton},
+ origdate = {1937},
+ title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+ venue = {Royal Opera House},
+ location = {London},
+ date = {2004-10-22}}
+ at performance{lord2007dc,
+ author = {Jon Lord},
+ date = {2007-10-20},
+ title = {Durham Concerto},
+ editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+ editortype = {performer},
+ editora = {Mischa Damev},
+ editoratype = {conductor},
+ venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+ location = {Durham}}
+ at performance{judge1995mnd,
+ options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+ author = {William Shakespeare},
+ title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+ editor = {Ian Judge},
+ editortype = {director},
+ date = {1995-02-26},
+ venue = {Theatre Royal},
+ location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
@online{bbc2013cgh,
author = {{BBC News}},
title = {Colchester General Hospital},
@@ -1577,3 +1720,14 @@
pages = {11\recto-11\verso},
layer = {inf},
bookpagination = {folio}}
+ at letter{anon2001pl,
+ title = {Personal letter to the author},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2001-05-02}}
+ at letter{ritter2001rp,
+ author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ title = {Revised proofs},
+ howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+ date = {2001-08-01},
+ url = {ogs at ritter.org.uk},
+ urldate = {2001-08-03}}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear-doc.tex 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\ProvidesFile{oxyear-doc.tex}
[\Version\space Author-year biblatex style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\PassOptionsToPackage{style=oxyear,varissuedate,anon}{biblatex}
@@ -134,6 +134,15 @@
{\multicitedelim}
{\usebibmacro{postnote}\finentrypunct}
\makeatother
+\DeclareSourcemap{%
+ \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+ \map[overwrite=true]{%
+ \pernottype{legslation}
+ \pernottype{legal}
+ \step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
+ }%
+ }%
+}
\hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
\usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
@@ -258,25 +267,25 @@
The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
- By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+ By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{literal}
means no special handling is used.
\item\docValue{long}
- will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+ will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
in citations and the bibliography.
\item\docValue{short}
- will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+ will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
in citations and the bibliography.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+ Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
\end{docKey}
@@ -301,32 +310,42 @@
Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+ This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+ (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{slash}
- separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+ separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
\item\docValue{colon}
- separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+ separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
\item\docValue{comma}
- separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+ separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
\item\docValue{parens}
- sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+ sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
\begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
- Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+ Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the \enquote{normal} position.
The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
- If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+ If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. It can also be set on a per-type basis.
\end{docKey}
\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
- Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+ Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{nonodate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Suppresses the printing of the \code{nodate} localization string when an entry is missing a recognizable date. It can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. It is automatically set to \val{true} for entries with a \code{sortyear}, on the assumption that the date has been given in a non-date field (e.g.\@ the number of a standard).
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
\end{docKey}
@@ -340,6 +359,11 @@
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+ Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+ while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -351,11 +375,6 @@
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
- This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -392,7 +411,7 @@
Code used in bibliography file.
\end{tcolorbox}
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
to other styles, are in amber:
\begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -464,36 +483,18 @@
For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
- \begin{itemize}\firmlist
- \item suppbook
- \item booklet
- \item suppcollection
- \item patent
- \item suppperiodical
- \item artwork
- \item commentary
- \item letter
- \item performance
- \item standard
- \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
-
You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
as well.
@@ -522,7 +523,7 @@
[72]{hankinson1989gba}
\end{egcite}
-Up to two author names are given, after which ‘et al.’ is used.
+Up to two author names are given, after which \enquote{et al.} is used.
\begin{egcite}{(Barnes and Griffin 1989; Brady et al. 1994)}
\parencite{barnes.griffin1989pte,%
@@ -544,12 +545,12 @@
\emph{New Hart's Rules} is mostly consistent with this, but has some variations where the author and date are separated by a comma, and where multiple references are also separated by commas.
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
\subsection{Missing attribution}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’ in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using ‘Anon.\@’ or a short title.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have \enquote{Anonymous} in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using \enquote{Anon.\@} or a short title.
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -592,7 +593,7 @@
\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
}
@@ -646,7 +647,7 @@
\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
- Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+ Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
\subsection{Pseudonyms}
@@ -762,7 +763,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
@@ -904,10 +905,10 @@
For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
- This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+ The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.9\textdagger>
@@ -924,12 +925,31 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+ \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+ \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+Otherwise, if you don't supply a suitable date, it will be replaced with the
+localization string \code{nodate}. If you don't want this behaviour, you can
+suppress it with the \key{nonodate} option, which can be set globally or on a
+per-type or per-entry basis.
+
\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
@@ -1214,7 +1234,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
@@ -1263,11 +1283,53 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+ author = {Alexander Ball},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2015},
+ journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {i-v},
+ doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+ title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+ date = {2006},
+ note = {Editorial},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1-2}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\section{Reviews}
\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.4.4\textdagger>
@@ -1435,7 +1497,7 @@
Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -1793,7 +1855,7 @@
\subsection{Reprints}
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
\tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
@@ -1833,7 +1895,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
\tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
@@ -2217,6 +2279,13 @@
\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
{gill1987intro}
@@ -2226,6 +2295,7 @@
@suppbook{gill1987intro,
author = {Roma Gill},
title = {introduction},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
volume = {1},
origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -2235,6 +2305,34 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+ author = {Robert Atwan},
+ title = {foreword},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ address = {Boston},
+ booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+ date = {2000},
+ editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+ publisher = {Houghton},
+ pages = {x-xvi}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
@@ -2530,8 +2628,14 @@
\section{Reports with a type or series}
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+ series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+ separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+ separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+ type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
+
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
{opcs1979amt}
Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979a), \emph{Area Mortality Tables: The Registrar-General's Decennial Supplement for England and Wales 1969–1973}, Series DS, No.~3 (London)
@@ -2548,8 +2652,6 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
-
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
{opcs1979pnc}
Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
@@ -2583,6 +2685,25 @@
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+ institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
\section{Theses}
\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution).}
@@ -2602,12 +2723,194 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
-\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution).}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution.}
+\end{itemize}
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+ title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+ date = {1921},
+ howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+ location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at booklet{lloyds2015m,
+ author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+ title = {Mortgages},
+ date = {2015},
+ howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+ author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+ title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+ date = {1986-02-04},
+ origdate = {1980-10-23},
+ type = {patentus},
+ number = {4,586,960},
+ location = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+ author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+ and Taverkere, Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+ title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {patentus},
+ holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+ number = {6177575}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{pm1981opa,
+ author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+ title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+ origdate = {1981-01-07},
+ date = {1985-05-15},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ number = {EP0021165}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at patent{hideki1992qmc,
+ author = {U. Hideki},
+ title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+ type = {patentjp},
+ number = {152932/92},
+ date = {1992-05-20}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+ you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+ for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{bs5605:1990,
+ sortyear = {1990},
+ title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+ number = {BS~5605:1990},
+ organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\cite{bs5605:1990}
+\end{egcite}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+ title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+ editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+ Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+ date = {2017-12-14},
+ type = {W3C Recommendation},
+ organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+ url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+ urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+ author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+ title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+ date = {1990-05},
+ organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+ series = {Request for Comments},
+ type = {Internet Standard},
+ number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+ doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
@@ -2906,7 +3209,7 @@
\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
- You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+ You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S15.14.2\textdagger>
@@ -2989,7 +3292,7 @@
\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
@@ -3097,10 +3400,15 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+ put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+ organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+ \code{location} for where it is.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
{clarkeNDeci}
@@ -3111,12 +3419,14 @@
author = {M. Clarke},
title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
titleaddon = {poster},
- organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+ institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
urldate = {2013-11-05}}
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
{ibwNDcgs}
@@ -3125,7 +3435,9 @@
\begin{Verbatim}
@image{ibwNDcgs,
title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
- note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+ type = {stained glass window},
+ venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+ location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
urldate = {2013-11-10}}
@@ -3132,11 +3444,121 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{davinci1480mr,
+ author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+ title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+ type = {oil on canvas},
+ note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+ year = {1480s},
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+ institution = {Louvre},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{gormley1998an,
+ author = {Anthony Gormley},
+ title = {Angel of the {North}},
+ date = {1998},
+ type = {sculpture},
+ location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at artwork{rodin1882k,
+ author = {Auguste Rodin},
+ title = {The Kiss},
+ date = {1882},
+ type = {marble},
+ institution = {Musée Rodin},
+ location = {Paris}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+ was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+ are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+ (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+ use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+ specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+ to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+ \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+ for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{ashton1937wb,
+ author = {Frederick Ashton},
+ origdate = {1937},
+ title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+ venue = {Royal Opera House},
+ location = {London},
+ date = {2004-10-22}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{lord2007dc,
+ author = {Jon Lord},
+ date = {2007-10-20},
+ title = {Durham Concerto},
+ editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+ editortype = {performer},
+ editora = {Mischa Damev},
+ editoratype = {conductor},
+ venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+ location = {Durham}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at performance{judge1995mnd,
+ options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+ author = {William Shakespeare},
+ title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+ editor = {Ian Judge},
+ editortype = {director},
+ date = {1995-02-26},
+ venue = {Theatre Royal},
+ location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
\section{Website articles}
@@ -3248,6 +3670,8 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
@@ -3254,8 +3678,6 @@
it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
{wp2013oup}
@@ -3325,7 +3747,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
{oup2015tweet}
@@ -3447,7 +3869,7 @@
\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
\val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
- The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+ The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
}
@@ -3537,6 +3959,8 @@
\parencite[13]{rvg2004}
\end{egcite}
+\hack{Note that in the cases above and below, the head of the reference won't match the citation, which may cause confusion. You may wish to hack the in-text citation to fix this.}
+
\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -3660,7 +4084,7 @@
The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
- Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+ Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -3680,7 +4104,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
@@ -3928,7 +4352,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate ‘n.d.’ label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography.}
+\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate \enquote{n.d.\@} label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography. You can also suppress the \enquote{n.d.\@} label by specifying \code{sortyear} or using the \key{nonodate} option.}
\begin{egcite}{(Refugee Convention: art.\@ 24)}
\parencite[24]{refugees}
@@ -4008,7 +4432,7 @@
it provides the \code{commentary} entry type simply as an alias for \code{book}.
\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
@@ -4125,7 +4549,7 @@
An author–date system like \textsf{oxyear} does not really lend itself to manuscript references,
but support is provided anyway for the sake of completeness.
-\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
@@ -4144,7 +4568,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
{smithMS23116}
-Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+Smith, F. (1912–7), travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@unpublished{smithMS23116,
@@ -4179,7 +4603,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
{chaundlerMS288}
-Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+Chaundler, T. (n.d.), \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{chaundlerMS288,
@@ -4194,7 +4618,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
{exchequerE311}
-exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+exchequer accounts (1798), Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{exchequerE311,
@@ -4208,7 +4632,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
{blcBOX19d}
-Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes (1949), 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{blcBOX19d,
@@ -4223,7 +4647,7 @@
\begin{bibexbox}
<NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
{bodMSrawl-d520}
-Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+Bodleian Library (n.d.), Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
@manuscript{bodMSrawl-d520,
@@ -4262,6 +4686,52 @@
bodMSrawl-d520}
\end{egcite}
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.11.1*\textdagger>
+{anon2001pl}
+Personal letter to the author (2001), 2 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{anon2001pl,
+ title = {Personal letter to the author},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2001-05-02}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+<OGS \S15.15.3*\textdagger>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+Ritter, R. M. (2001), \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@), \url{ogs at ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+ at letter{ritter2001rp,
+ author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ title = {Revised proofs},
+ howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+ date = {2001-08-01},
+ url = {ogs at ritter.org.uk},
+ urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
\end{document}
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.dtx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse
%<*internal|bbx|cbx|dbx|lbx|doc>
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
%</internal|bbx|cbx|dbx|lbx|doc>
%<*internal>
\iffalse
@@ -102,7 +102,8 @@
%</readme>
%<*bib>
@reference{ritter2002ogs,
- author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ editor = {R. M. Ritter},
+ editortype= {editorcm},
title = {The {Oxford} Guide to Style},
date = {2002},
publisher = {Oxford University Press},
@@ -328,17 +329,21 @@
% \finentrypunct
% }{}%
% }{}{}
-%<*doc&(m|a)>
+%<*doc>
% Shorthands useful for oxyear make overlong labels for oxnum/oxalph,
% so we remove them.
\DeclareSourcemap{%
\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
\map[overwrite=true]{%
+%<a> \pertype{legislation}
+%<a> \pertype{legal}
+%<n|y> \pernottype{legslation}
+%<n|y> \pernottype{legal}
\step[fieldset=shorthand, null=true]
}%
}%
}
-%</doc&(m|a)>
+%</doc>
\hypersetup{pdfborder={0 0 0},pdfencoding=auto}
\usepackage[noabbrev,capitalize,nameinlink]{cleveref}
@@ -813,23 +818,19 @@
The style has some options additional to the regular \pkg{biblatex} ones:
-\begin{docKey}{altthesis}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Puts the thesis type inside, rather than outside, the parenthetical publication block.
-\end{docKey}
-
\begin{docKey}{anon}{=\val{literal}|\val{long}|\val{short}}{default \val{short}, initially \val{literal}}
Affects what happens if the author name matches the value of \cs{oxrefanon}.
- By default, this is ‘Anonymous’, but you could change it a different word (such as ‘Anonimo’) instead.
+ By default, this is \enquote{Anonymous}, but you could change it a different word (such as \enquote{Anonimo}) instead.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{literal}
means no special handling is used.
\item\docValue{long}
- will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anonymous’) instead of the author name
+ will print the unabbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anonymous}) instead of the author name
%<y> in citations and the bibliography.
%<m|a> in the bibliography.
%<n> in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
\item\docValue{short}
- will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (‘Anon.\@’) instead of the author name
+ will print the abbreviated localization string \code{anon} (\enquote{Anon.\@}) instead of the author name
%<y> in citations and the bibliography.
%<m|a> in the bibliography.
%<n> in the bibliography, but neither are printed in citations.
@@ -836,6 +837,10 @@
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{bookseries}{=\val{in}|\val{out}}{default \val{in}, initially \val{in}}
+ Puts the series information for a book \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{court-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints courts of decision without parentheses.
\end{docKey}
@@ -860,18 +865,24 @@
Surrounds URLs with angle brackets.
\end{docKey}
+\begin{docKey}{issuedate-plain}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
+ This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
+ (This option was previously called \key{varissuedate}.)
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{issuestyle}{=\val{slash}|\val{colon}|\val{comma}|\val{parens}}{default \val{slash}, initially \val{slash}}
Affects how journal volumes and numbers are printed.
\begin{itemize}
\item\docValue{slash}
- separates the two with a solidus, e.g. ‘23/2’.
+ separates the two with a solidus, e.g. \enquote{23/2}.
\item\docValue{colon}
- separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. ‘23: 2’.
+ separates the two with a colon and space, e.g. \enquote{23: 2}.
%<a|y> It is intended for use with \textsf{oxnotes}\slash\textsf{oxnum} and not recommended for this style.
\item\docValue{comma}
- separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. ‘23, 2’.
+ separates the two with a comma and space, e.g. \enquote{23, 2}.
\item\docValue{parens}
- sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. ‘23 (2)’.
+ sets off the issue number in parentheses, e.g. \enquote{23 (2)}.
%<n|m> It is intended for use with \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} and not recommended for this style.
\end{itemize}
\end{docKey}
@@ -878,17 +889,23 @@
%<*a|y>
\begin{docKey}{mergedate}{=\val{maximum}|\val{compact}|\val{basic}|\val{minimum}|\val{year}|\val{false}}{default \val{year}, initially \val{year}}
- Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the ‘normal’ position.
+ Affects how the date at the start of the references relates to the date in the \enquote{normal} position.
The default value of \val{year} is intended for use with the default setting of \key{labeldate}\texttt{=}\val{year}.
- If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}.
+ If you set \key{labeldate} to something else, you will probably want to set this option to \val{compact} or \val{maximum}. It can also be set on a per-type basis.
\end{docKey}
%</a|y>
\begin{docKey}{nolocation}{}{no value, initially unset}
- Replaces missing locations with ‘n.p.’ or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
+ Replaces missing locations with \enquote{n.p.} or the localized equivalent in books, collections, reference works, proceedings, and similar entry types. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
Alternatively, it may be set on a per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
+%<*a|y>
+\begin{docKey}{nonodate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
+ Suppresses the printing of the \code{nodate} localization string when an entry is missing a recognizable date. It can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis. It is automatically set to \val{true} for entries with a \code{sortyear}, on the assumption that the date has been given in a non-date field (e.g.\@ the number of a standard).
+\end{docKey}
+%</a|y>
+
\begin{docKey}{nopublisher}{}{no value, initially unset}
Removes publisher name from all entries. Once set, this option cannot be overridden.
\end{docKey}
@@ -907,6 +924,11 @@
\end{docKey}
%</n|m>
+\begin{docKey}{thesis}{=\val{in}|\val{out}|\val{plain}}{default \val{out}, initially \val{out}}
+ Puts the thesis type \docValue{in}side or \docValue{out}side the parenthetical publication block,
+ while \docValue{plain} removes the parentheses entirely.
+\end{docKey}
+
\begin{docKey}{timefirst}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
Prints the time (if provided) before the date instead of after it.
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
@@ -918,11 +940,6 @@
This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
\end{docKey}
-\begin{docKey}{varissuedate}{=\val{true}|\val{false}}{default \val{true}, initially \val{false}}
- Removes the parentheses around the date of a periodical without a volume number.
- This can also be set on a per-type and per-entry basis.
-\end{docKey}
-
\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} makes use of Biber-specific techniques to solve some of the challenges presented by Oxford style.
It will not stop you from using Bib\TeX\ instead but, if you do, only simple and standard entries will work.
In particular, manuscripts, legal references and anything involving related entries will be adversely affected.
@@ -959,7 +976,7 @@
Code used in bibliography file.
\end{tcolorbox}
-Examples that have been ‘hacked’ in some way, and are therefore not portable
+Examples that have been \enquote{hacked} in some way, and are therefore not portable
to other styles, are in amber:
\begin{tcolorbox}%
@@ -1033,36 +1050,18 @@
For information on installing the styles, and for the documented source code,
see the separate documentation file \href{./oxref.pdf}{\texttt{oxref.pdf}}
-\section{To do}
+\section{Stability}
The \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} family of styles is currently at \fileversion.
-As mentioned above, what the styles \emph{should} be doing is open to some
-interpretation, so at the moment I am open to the idea of changing how the
-styles handle cases not covered by the two style manuals. Please leave your
-thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-At some point version 1.0 will be released, after which the default (expected)
-behaviour of the styles will be fixed, though alternative behaviour may be added.
+I have no further features planned, so unless there is popular demand otherwise,
+it should be bug-fix releases only between now and the release of version 1.0.
+When that happens, the default (expected) behaviour of the styles will be frozen,
+meaning I will do my best to avoid backwards-incompatible changes, though
+alternative behaviour may be added. If you spot any aspects of the styles that
+could be improved before then, especially for the cases not covered by the two
+style manuals, please leave your thoughts on the GitHub issue tracker.%
+\footnote{\url{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}}
-I do not have any examples to work from for the following entry types, so they
-are currently untested. If you have strong feelings about how they should be
-rendered in Oxford style and can provide me with a sample reference or several,
-I would be most glad to hear from you:
-
-\begin{multicols}{3}
- \begin{itemize}\firmlist
- \item suppbook
- \item booklet
- \item suppcollection
- \item patent
- \item suppperiodical
- \item artwork
- \item commentary
- \item letter
- \item performance
- \item standard
- \end{itemize}
-\end{multicols}
-
You are of course encouraged to report any bugs you discover on the
\href{https://github.com/alex-ball/biblatex-oxref/issues}{GitHub issue tracker}
as well.
@@ -1129,7 +1128,7 @@
\end{egcite}
\addtocategory{hidden}{cobban}
-Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations ‘ibid.\@’, ‘op.\@ cit.\@’, ‘loc.\@ cit.\@’, and ‘id.\@’ and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
+Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe an alternative system that uses the abbreviations \enquote{ibid.\@}, \enquote{op.\@ cit.\@}, \enquote{loc.\@ cit.\@}, and \enquote{id.\@} and friends, though with underwhelming enthusiasm. If you would like to use these abbreviations, load the \textsf{verbose-trad1} citation scheme instead (and remember to use the \code{gender} field):
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\usepackage[bibstyle=oxnotes,citestyle=verbose-trad1]{biblatex}
@@ -1139,7 +1138,9 @@
%<*m|a>
Both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} describe a system that uses simple numbers as citation labels, almost as if they were endnotes. This system does not support page references, unlike the citation labels familiar to \LaTeX\ users. In the absence of a better idea, therefore, this style treats citation labels rather like author–year parenthetical citations and adopts the conventions from \textsf{oxyear}. Pages are set off with a colon, and multiple works are separated with a semicolon.
-\begin{egcite}{}
+\begin{egcite}%
+%<m>{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelnumber}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelnumber}: 72]}
+%<a>{Test [\citefield{hankinson1988mmm}{labelalpha}: 93, 96; \citefield{hankinson1989gba}{labelalpha}: 72]}
Test \parencites%
[93, 96]{hankinson1988mmm}%
[72]{hankinson1989gba}
@@ -1163,7 +1164,7 @@
[72]{hankinson1989gba}
\end{egcite}
-Up to two author names are given, after which ‘et al.’ is used.
+Up to two author names are given, after which \enquote{et al.} is used.
\begin{egcite}{(Barnes and Griffin 1989; Brady et al. 1994)}
\parencite{barnes.griffin1989pte,%
@@ -1201,17 +1202,17 @@
\emph{New Hart's Rules} is mostly consistent with this, but has some variations where the author and date are separated by a comma, and where multiple references are also separated by commas.
%</y>
-\section{Missing and inferred attribution}
+\section{Missing or inferred attribution}
\subsection{Missing attribution}
%<*n>
-Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under ‘Anonymous’ (or ‘Anon.\@’ in the latter case) in the bibliography.
+Where works have no attribution, both the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} and \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggest printing them without further adornment in notes, but listing them under \enquote{Anonymous} (or \enquote{Anon.\@} in the latter case) in the bibliography.
%</n>
%<*y>
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have ‘Anonymous’ in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using ‘Anon.\@’ or a short title.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} prefers anonymous works to have \enquote{Anonymous} in place of the author name, while \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using \enquote{Anon.\@} or a short title.
%</y>
-\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of ‘Anonymous’ (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
+\tip{\pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} will not automatically generate anonymous labels for you, but if you use the \key{anon} option (see \cref{sec:loading}), you can transform an author name of \enquote{Anonymous} (or whatever \cs{oxrefanon} is set to) in your .bib file to either the long or short localization string \code{anon}.
%<n> Doing this will automatically suppress the printing of the anonymous author in notes.
}
@@ -1277,8 +1278,8 @@
\subsection{Pseudepigraphy}
Some older works are known to have been written pseudepigraphically, that is, falsely attributed to a more famous author. The way of indicating this in Oxford style, if desired, is
-%<n>to add the prefix ‘Pseudo-’ before the name in notes, and
-to put ‘(Ps.-)’ after the name in the bibliography.
+%<n>to add the prefix \enquote{Pseudo-} before the name in notes, and
+to put \enquote{(Ps.-)} after the name in the bibliography.
\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the name with the keyword \code{pseudo}.
%<n>Since this mechanism is aimed at ancient texts, it has only been designed to work with single-part names
@@ -1350,7 +1351,7 @@
\tip{You can also use the syntax from \textsf{biblatex-realauthor}.
If you do not specify the \code{author}, then \code{realauthor} is treated as an alias for \code{author} annotated with the keyword \code{inferred}.
The equivalent is true for \code{realeditor}.
- Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \code{userealauthor} and \code{userealeditor} options.}
+ Note, however, that \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not recognize the \key{userealauthor} and \key{userealeditor} options.}
\subsection{Pseudonyms}
@@ -1507,7 +1508,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
+\tip{Annotate \emph{either} the \code{editor} \emph{or} \code{translator} field with the keyword \code{jointauthor} to promote the name to the joint author position (you cannot do it for both). Internally, what this does is move the names to the \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}-specific \code{jointauthor} field; you can use this and \code{jointauthortype} directly if you like, at the cost of portability to other styles. Note that you have to supply a suitable \code{shortauthor} value yourself; \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} does not calculate it for you.}
\section{Titular prefixes}\label{sec:nametitles}
@@ -1675,10 +1676,10 @@
For periodicals, grey literature, audiovisual and online material, the lack of a place of publication is not surprising; indeed it may be expected. For books, however, it may be remarkable and deserve marking in the bibliography with \enquote{n.p.\@} (for \enquote{no place}).
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \code{nolocation} bibliography option.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for books, collections, reference works, proceedings and similar entry types, use the \key{nolocation} bibliography option.}
-\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \code{nolocation} entry option instead.
- This has the feature of hiding the \enquote{n.p.\@} from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
+\tip{To have \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} automatically insert \enquote{n.p.\@} or the localized equivalent for only a specific entry, use the \key{nolocation} entry option instead.
+ The advantage of doing this over simply giving \enquote{n.p.\@} as the publisher is that it hides it from other styles that do not follow the same convention.}
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.9>
@@ -1699,7 +1700,27 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Missing or inferred date of publication}
+If the date is missing from a work, you can sometimes make an educated guess
+what it should be. It is usual practice to enclose such guesses in square
+brackets.
+
+\tip{With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can achieve this by annotating the
+ \code{date}, \code{origdate}, or \code{eventdate} field with the keyword
+ \code{inferred}.}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+\end{tcblisting}
+%<*a|y>
+
+Otherwise, if you don't supply a suitable date, it will be replaced with the
+localization string \code{nodate}. If you don't want this behaviour, you can
+suppress it with the \key{nonodate} option, which can be set globally or on a
+per-type or per-entry basis.
+%</a|y>
+
\chapter{Articles and periodicals}\label{sec:article}
\chapterprecis{article, periodical, suppperiodical, review}
@@ -1706,7 +1727,7 @@
\section{Articles in periodicals with volumes/numbers}
-The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxyear} which uses a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \textsf{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
+The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} consistently prefers volume and part numbers to be written like \enquote{23/2}, but also discusses formats such as \enquote{23: 2} and \enquote{23 (2)}. \emph{New Hart's Rules} adds \enquote{23, 2} as a further possibility. The latter two are better suited to \textsf{oxalph}\slash\textsf{oxyear} which use a colon to demarcate the page numbers. These variations are implemented as the option \key{issuestyle}; see \autoref{sec:loading} for details.
%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
@@ -1851,11 +1872,11 @@
% Electronic identifier instead of a page range
\begin{bibexbox}(hacked)
-%<n><NHR \S18.8.5*>
-%<y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
+%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5*>
+%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5*\textdagger>
{li.etal2013flh}
-%<n>Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11 (2013), e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
-%<y>Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
+%<n|m>Shu Li et al., \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11 (2013), e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
+%<a|y>Li, S. et al. (2013), \enquote{Forever Love: The Hitherto Earliest Record of Copulating Insects from the Middle Jurassic of China}, \emph{PLoS ONE}, 8/11, e78188. doi: \path{10.1371/journal.pone.0078188}
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
%</n|m|a|y>
@@ -2205,7 +2226,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of ‘pp.’ (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
+\tip{Use \code{bookpagination} to force the display of \enquote{pp.} (since the number format is odd), and \cs{DeclareNumChars*}\brackets{S} to ensure that \code{S61} is recognized as a number.}%
\section{Articles that span multiple issues}
@@ -2266,12 +2287,58 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\section{Editorials and other regular features}
+
+Strictly speaking, when a work is headed \enquote{Editorial} or \enquote{Letter to the Editor}
+in a periodical, this is a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If a piece has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ball2015ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at suppperiodical{ball2015ed,
+ author = {Alexander Ball},
+ title = {Editorial},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2015},
+ journaltitle = {International Journal of Digital Curation},
+ volume = {10},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {i-v},
+ doi = {10.2218/ijdc.v10i1.376}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{jccm2006ed}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at suppperiodical{jccm2006ed,
+ title = {\enquote{What a Disaster} and Why Does This Question Matter?},
+ date = {2006},
+ note = {Editorial},
+ journaltitle = {Journal of Contingencies and Crisis Management},
+ volume = {14},
+ pages = {1-2}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\section{Reviews}
%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number (Year), Pages.}
%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, \lit{review of} ReviewedWork, \lit{in} \emph{JournalTitle}, Vol/Number: Pages.}
-\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the ‘related’ field, and use the key ‘reviewof’ as the ‘relatedtype’.}
+\tip{To get this format, use a separate entry for the reviewed item, reference it in the \enquote{related} field, and use the key \enquote{reviewof} as the \enquote{relatedtype}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><OGS \S15.4.4>
@@ -2589,7 +2656,7 @@
Biblatex uses \code{reference} for encyclopaedias and dictionaries, which are typically made up of many small contributions by distinct authors and compiled by an editorial board whose membership might change between successive editions. From a database perspective, reference works are like collections in that they have no single author (a reference work written by a single author should use the \code{book} entry type instead).
-\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \texttt{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
+\tip{The \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} considers the titles of reference works to be more important and memorable than those of the editor, and so lists the title first, but \emph{New Hart's Rules} doesn't. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} takes the former approach, but you can switch to the latter by setting the \key{useeditor} option back to true for this type.}
\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[reference,mvreference]{useeditor=true}
@@ -3104,7 +3171,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get ‘revised edition’. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get ‘revised and enlarged edition’}
+\tip{Use the localization key \code{revised} as the edition to get \enquote{revised edition}. Use the localization key \code{revisedenlarged} as the edition to get \enquote{revised and enlarged edition}}
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.2.1*>
{gibbon1686dfs}
@@ -3127,7 +3194,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after ‘rev. edn.’ in the above reference; this may be an error.}
+\info{In the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style}, there is no comma after \enquote{rev. edn.} in the above reference; this may be an error.}
%</n|m>
%<*a|y>
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
@@ -3166,7 +3233,7 @@
%<a|y>\spec{Author (OrigYear), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher).}
%<n|m>\tip{This format is triggered if you specify an original date but do not specify the original publisher or location, nor the edition of the later publication.}
-%<n|m>\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses ‘originally published’ instead of ‘first published’. This is because ‘originally’ is more common among the available examples.}
+%<n|m>\info{In the following example, you will see the style uses \enquote{originally published} instead of \enquote{first published}. This is because \enquote{originally} is more common among the available examples.}
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><OGS \S15.2.3>
@@ -3192,7 +3259,7 @@
\subsection{Reprints}
%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{repr.} Location: Publisher).}
\tip{Use localization key \code{reprint} as the edition. For a revised reprint, use \code{revisedreprint}.}
@@ -3241,7 +3308,7 @@
\end{bibexbox}
%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher, Year; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year/Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year–Year), \emph{Title} (Location: Publisher; \lit{facs. edn.}, Location: Publisher).}
\tip{Use localization key \code{facsimile} as the edition.}
@@ -3797,6 +3864,13 @@
\section{Supplementary works in books and collections}
+If the work is headed \enquote{Introduction}, \enquote{Foreword}, \enquote{Afterword}, or similar,
+this is technically a descriptor rather than a title.
+
+\tip{If the work has a true title, the descriptor goes in the \code{note} field.
+ If it doesn't, the descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to correct the formatting.
+ Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><NHR \S18.2.6*>
%<a|y><NHR \S18.2.6*\textdagger>
@@ -3809,6 +3883,7 @@
@suppbook{gill1987intro,
author = {Roma Gill},
title = {introduction},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
booktitle = {The Complete Works of Christopher Marlow},
volume = {1},
origlocation = {Oxford},
@@ -3819,7 +3894,36 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{atwan2000fw}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at suppcollection{atwan2000fw,
+ author = {Robert Atwan},
+ title = {foreword},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ address = {Boston},
+ booktitle = {The Best American Essays of the Century},
+ date = {2000},
+ editor = {Joyce Carol Oates and Robert Atwan},
+ publisher = {Houghton},
+ pages = {x-xvi}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+It is quite rare for such items to have a true title in addition, so previous
+versions of \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} treated all titles of \texttt{suppbook}
+entries as descriptors.
+
+\tip{To restore the previous behaviour, include the following code:}
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1}
+\end{tcblisting}
+
\chapter{Works presented at meetings}\label{sec:proceedings}
\chapterprecis{proceedings, mvproceedings, inproceedings, unpublished}
@@ -4254,9 +4358,15 @@
\section{Reports with a type or series}
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Number (Location: Institution).}
+\tip{The number of a report will only be printed if you also supply a type or
+ series, or both. The difference between the two is that the series will be
+ separated from the (type and) number by a comma, while only a space
+ separates the type and number. In addition, if you supply a series but no
+ type, the number will be prefixed by `No.\@' or the localized equivalent.}
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Series, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
+
%</n|m|a|y>
%<*a|y>
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
@@ -4279,9 +4389,6 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \emph{Title}, Type Number (Location: Institution).}
-
\begin{bibexbox}<OGS \S15.19.2>
{opcs1979pnc}
Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (1979b), \emph{Projections of the New Commonwealth and Pakistani Population}, OPCS Monitor PP2 79/1 (London)
@@ -4325,7 +4432,25 @@
%</a|y>
%<*n|m|a|y>%
+\section{Jointly published reports}
+It is more common with reports than with books for a work to be branded
+jointly by several issuing organizations. Neither the \emph{Oxford Guide to
+Style} nor \emph{New Hart's Rules} give explicit guidance on this, but I
+suggest handling it by giving corresponding lists as the \code{location}
+and \code{institution}:
+
+\begin{tcblisting}{listing only}
+ location = {Place 1 and Place 2 and Place 3},
+ institution = {Organization 1 and Organization 2 and Organization 3},
+\end{tcblisting}
+
+This will be printed as follows:
+
+\begin{tcolorbox}
+(Place 1: Organization 1, Place 2: Organization 2, and Place 3: Organization 3)
+\end{tcolorbox}
+
\section{Theses}
%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type (Institution, Year).}
@@ -4350,15 +4475,218 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+The following forms are also supported; to use them, pass the \key{thesis} option:
-The following form is also supported: to use it, pass the \texttt{altthesis} option.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{in}\par
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution, Year).}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title} (Type, Institution).}
+ \item \key{thesis}\texttt{=}\val{plain}\par
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution, Year.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, Type, Institution.}
+\end{itemize}
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution, Year).}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}, (Type, Institution).}
+\section{Booklets, leaflets, and other formal but unpublished texts}
+There are no obvious examples of this kind of material in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{msbh1921fvd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at booklet{msbh1921fvd,
+ title = {The Facts about Venereal Diseases},
+ date = {1921},
+ howpublished = {distributed by the Missouri State Board of Health, Division of Venereal Diseases},
+ location = {Jefferson City, MO}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lloyds2015m}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at booklet{lloyds2015m,
+ author = {{Lloyds TSB Bank plc}},
+ title = {Mortgages},
+ date = {2015},
+ howpublished = {obtained in Paisley branch}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Patents}
+
+There are no examples of patents in the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} or
+\emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+Following the conventions from \pkg{biblatex-chicago}, use \texttt{origdate} for
+the date the patent was filed (or the application was published), and
+\texttt{date} for the date the patent was finally issued or published.
+
+\tip{You can override the default date descriptions with the (non-standard)
+\code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at patent{petroff.stapelbroek1980bib,
+ author = {Petroff, M.~D. and Stapelbroek, M.~G.},
+ title = {Blocked impurity band detectors},
+ date = {1986-02-04},
+ origdate = {1980-10-23},
+ type = {patentus},
+ number = {4,586,960},
+ location = {Washington, DC},
+ publisher = {U.S. Patent and Trademark Office}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{arduengo.etal2001pmi}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at patent{arduengo.etal2001pmi,
+ author = {Arduengo, III, Anthony J. and Gentry, Jr., Frederick P.
+ and Taverkere, Prakash~K. and Simmons, III, Howard E.},
+ title = {Process for manufacture of imidazoles},
+ year = {2001},
+ type = {patentus},
+ holder = {{E.~I. DuPont}},
+ number = {6177575}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{pm1981opa}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at patent{pm1981opa,
+ author = {{Phillipp Morris Inc.}},
+ title = {Optical perforating apparatus and system},
+ origdate = {1981-01-07},
+ date = {1985-05-15},
+ type = {patenteu},
+ number = {EP0021165}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{hideki1992qmc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at patent{hideki1992qmc,
+ author = {U. Hideki},
+ title = {Quadrature Modulation Circuit},
+ type = {patentjp},
+ number = {152932/92},
+ date = {1992-05-20}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Standards}
+
+There are no examples of technical standards in the \emph{Oxford Guide
+to Style} or \emph{New Hart's Rules}. I welcome suggestions for how to make the
+generated references more Oxford-like.
+
+The particular quirk with standards entries is that the number is promoted to
+the head of the reference if an author is not specified (or \key{useauthor} is
+\val{false}). If this happens, the number is copied to \code{sortkey} so the
+entry appears in the right place in the reference list, unless you get there
+first with your own value of \code{sortkey}. You may want to do this if, for
+example, you want \enquote{ISO 1000} to come after \enquote{ISO 999}.
+
+\tip{You are encouraged to put the standards body in \code{organization}, but
+ you can use \code{publisher} instead.}
+
+\tip{The examples don't demonstrate it, but you can use the \code{version} field
+ for the version of the standard.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{bs5605:1990}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at standard{bs5605:1990,
+ sortyear = {1990},
+ title = {Recommendations for citing and referencing published material},
+ number = {BS~5605:1990},
+%<!n&!m&!y> shorthand = {BS5605},
+ organization = {British Standards Institute}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+%<*y>
+\begin{egcite}{}
+\cite{bs5605:1990}
+\end{egcite}
+%</y>
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{w3c2017html5.2}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at standard{w3c2017html5.2,
+ title = {{HTML} 5.2},
+ editor = {Steve Faulkner and Arron Eicholz and Travis Leithead and
+ Alex Danilo and Sangwhan Moon},
+ date = {2017-12-14},
+ type = {W3C Recommendation},
+ organization = {World Wide Web Consortium},
+ url = {https://www.w3.org/TR/html52/},
+ urldate = {2018-02-17}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ietf.rfc1155}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at standard{ietf.rfc1155,
+ author = {M. T. Rose and K. McCloghrie},
+ title = {Structure and identification of management information for {TCP/IP}-based internets},
+ date = {1990-05},
+ organization = {Internet Engineering Task Force},
+ series = {Request for Comments},
+ type = {Internet Standard},
+ number = {RFC~1155/STD~16},
+ doi = {10.17487/RFC1155}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
\chapter{Audiovisual materials}\label{sec:audiovideo}
-\chapterprecis{audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, video}
+\chapterprecis{artwork, audio, inaudio, image, movie, music, inmusic, performance, video}
There are typically many contributors to an audiovisual work, and the priority given to each role is fluid. \pkg[biblatex]{Oxref} uses \code{author} for contributors that should go at the head of the reference, and \code{editor} for others. As well as the normal ones you can use the author\slash editor types \code{performer}, \code{conductor}, \code{director} and \code{reader}.
@@ -4713,7 +5041,7 @@
\tip{You can place up to four credits in the editor position, more if any of them correspond to the built-in editor types like \texttt{commentator} or \texttt{translator}.
If you do supply a lot of credits, the \emph{Oxford Guide to Style} recommends you shift them to the end of the reference.
- You can do this with the \texttt{endeditor} option.}
+ You can do this with the \key{endeditor} option.}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -4815,7 +5143,7 @@
%<n|m>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle}, \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Date.}
%<a|y>\spec{\enquote{EpisodeTitle} (Year), \emph{SeriesTitle}, \lit{Episode} EpisodeNumber, Channel, Day Month.}
-\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. ‘Episode 1’) goes in the \code{note} field.
+\tip{If the episode has a true title, the episide descriptor (e.g. \enquote{Episode 1}) goes in the \code{note} field.
If it doesn't, the episode descriptor goes in the \code{title} field; annotate the field with the keyword \code{descriptor} to remove the quote marks.
Alternatively, use the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field for the episode descriptor in all cases, and \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} will take care of this for you.}
@@ -4945,10 +5273,15 @@
\end{bibexbox}
-\section{Images}
+\section{Images and works of art}
-\tip{If desired, use \code{titleaddon} to specify the type of image.}
+\tip{If you need the type of image or arrtwork to appear in square brackets,
+ put it in \code{titleaddon}. Otherwise, put it in \code{type}.}
+\tip{Use \code{institution} (a list) or \code{venue} (a literal) for the
+ organization, museum, gallery or building physically hosting the image, and
+ \code{location} for where it is.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5>
%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -4962,7 +5295,7 @@
author = {M. Clarke},
title = {Exports of Coal to the IFS},
titleaddon = {poster},
- organization = {Manchester Art Gallery},
+ institution = {Manchester Art Gallery},
url = {http://www.machestergalleries.org/the-collections/search-the-collection/display.php?EMUSESSID=70bd7f1a388d79a82f52ea9aae713ef2&irn=4128},
urldate = {2013-11-05}}
%<*n|m|a|y>
@@ -4969,6 +5302,8 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Use \code{organization} for the website or online location of the image.}
+
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5>
%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -4980,7 +5315,9 @@
%</n|m|a|y>
@image{ibwNDcgs,
title = {Christ the Good Shepherd},
- note = {stained glass window, Church of St Erfyl, Llanerfyl, Powys},
+ type = {stained glass window},
+ venue = {Church of St Erfyl},
+ location = {Llanerfyl, Powys},
organization = {Imaging the Bible in Wales Database},
url = {http://imagingthebible.llgc.org.uk/object/1884},
urldate = {2013-11-10}}
@@ -4988,12 +5325,133 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{davinci1480mr}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at artwork{davinci1480mr,
+ author = {given=Leonardo, family=da Vinci},
+ title = {Madonna of the Rocks},
+ type = {oil on canvas},
+ note = {78 x 48.5 in\adddot},
+ year = {1480s},
+ date+an = {=inferred},
+ institution = {Louvre},
+ location = {Paris}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{gormley1998an}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at artwork{gormley1998an,
+ author = {Anthony Gormley},
+ title = {Angel of the {North}},
+ date = {1998},
+ type = {sculpture},
+ location = {Low Fell, Gateshead}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{rodin1882k}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at artwork{rodin1882k,
+ author = {Auguste Rodin},
+ title = {The Kiss},
+ date = {1882},
+ type = {marble},
+ institution = {Musée Rodin},
+ location = {Paris}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\section{Performances}
+
+\tip{Use \code{origdate} for the date when the play, ballet, opera, or whatever
+ was written or premièred, and \code{date} for the date of the performance you
+ are referencing. You can specify what these dates signify with the
+ (non-standard) \code{origdatetype} and \code{datetype} fields. You can also
+ use \code{eventdate} in place of \code{date}, but then you won't be able to
+ specify the type.}
+
+\tip{As for recordings, you can use the \code{author} and \code{editor} fields
+ to provide various credits. As for artworks, use \code{venue} and
+ \code{location} for where the performance occurred, and \code{organization}
+ for a website or organization hosting a recording of the performance online.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{ashton1937wb}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at performance{ashton1937wb,
+ author = {Frederick Ashton},
+ origdate = {1937},
+ title = {A Wedding Bouquet},
+ venue = {Royal Opera House},
+ location = {London},
+ date = {2004-10-22}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{lord2007dc}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at performance{lord2007dc,
+ author = {Jon Lord},
+ date = {2007-10-20},
+ title = {Durham Concerto},
+ editor = {{Liverpool Philharmonic Orchestra}},
+ editortype = {performer},
+ editora = {Mischa Damev},
+ editoratype = {conductor},
+ venue = {Durham Cathedral},
+ location = {Durham}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+{judge1995mnd}
+(not in book)
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at performance{judge1995mnd,
+ options = {useauthor=false,useeditor=false},
+ author = {William Shakespeare},
+ title = {A Midsummer Night's Dream},
+ editor = {Ian Judge},
+ editortype = {director},
+ date = {1995-02-26},
+ venue = {Theatre Royal},
+ location = {Newcastle upon Tyne}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
\chapter{Digital media}\label{sec:electronic}
\chapterprecis{online, software, dataset}
In Section 18.8.5 of \emph{New Hart's Rules}, some publication dates are printed in parentheses and some are left bare.
-In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate ‘proper’ publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
+In theory, the difference should be that parentheses indicate \enquote{proper} publication (bare dates are when the resource was created or issued). In practice, it seems to be random. I have therefore decided to ignore the variation and leave all such dates in parentheses.
\section{Website articles}
@@ -5130,6 +5588,8 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
+\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
+
\info{It is not made explicit why \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is in italics and \emph{Wikipedia} is not.
It might be historical or customary, because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} was established as a print publication and \emph{Wikipedia} has only been online;
it might be because \emph{Encyclopaedia Britannica} is a Latin title;
@@ -5136,8 +5596,6 @@
it might reflect an opinion on the two resources;
or it may just be illustrative of variant practice.}
-\tip{Unlike standard \textsf{biblatex}, \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} supports \code{maintitle} for online entries and prints the result in italics. For more portability, you could either hard-code the italics into the \code{organization} field or use the \code{article} entry type.}
-
\begin{bibexbox}
%<n|m><NHR \S18.8.5>
%<a|y><NHR \S18.8.5\textdagger>
@@ -5224,7 +5682,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like ‘Twitter post’ instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
+\tip{If it feels odd putting the entire content of a tweet in your reference, \emph{New Hart's Rules} suggests using a descriptor like \enquote{Twitter post} instead of the title. As described in \cref{sec:broadcasts}, you can do this either by annotating the title field with the keyword \code{descriptor} or by using the (non-standard) \code{descriptor} field in place of \code{title}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
{oup2015tweet}
@@ -5362,7 +5820,7 @@
\tip{Several additional pagination types are defined for use with legal citations:
\val{article}, \val{clause}, \val{regulation}, and \val{rule} all work as normal.
- The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the ‘para’ (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
+ The default is a bare number (\val{none}), indicating a page reference, though EU and ECHR cases default to using the \enquote{para} (\val{paragraph}) prefix.
There is also an alternative pagination type for paragraphs, \val{[]}, which prints the number in square brackets instead of giving it a prefix.
}
@@ -5486,6 +5944,8 @@
\end{egcite}
%</y>
+%<y>\hack{Note that in the cases above and below, the head of the reference won't match the citation, which may cause confusion. You may wish to hack the in-text citation to fix this.}
+
\tip{If a report is published a long time after the decision, you can put the decision date in \code{origdate} to clarify the situation.}
\begin{bibexbox}
@@ -5625,7 +6085,7 @@
The \key{ecli} option determines under what circumstances the identifier is printed.}
\tip{European cases still get sorted by title, even if the entry begins with the case number.
- Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under ‘Case’ or ‘Joined Cases’.}
+ Use \code{sorttitle} if you would rather they were sorted under \enquote{Case} or \enquote{Joined Cases}.}
\begin{bibexbox}
<OGS \S13.4.4>
@@ -5647,7 +6107,7 @@
\end{Verbatim}
\end{bibexbox}
-\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word ‘Case’ if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
+\tip{Indicate Commission Decisions by putting \code{commission} in the \code{institution} field. If a decision has a formal decision number, put this in the \code{number} field. Put the case number (including the word \enquote{Case} if needed) in either the \code{titleaddon}, \code{parvolume}, or \code{userb} field.}
\tip{An unfortunate side effect of this is that is not possible to use either the parallel or neutral citation idiom to get a reference to look like the following. In such cases, use the \code{note} field to provide the second citation.}
@@ -5923,7 +6383,7 @@
@legal{refugees,
entrysubtype = {piltreaty},
title = {Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees},
-%<!m|a> shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
+%<!m&!a> shorthand = {Refugee Convention},
execution = {adopted=1951-07-28 and inforce=1954-04-22},
pagination = {article},
volume = {189},
@@ -5934,7 +6394,7 @@
\end{bibexbox}
%<*y>
-\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate ‘n.d.’ label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography.}
+\tip{Since the lack of a \code{date} field may cause an inaccurate \enquote{n.d.\@} label to be printed, use the \code{shorthand} field to provide a sensible citation label. You could use \cs{citetitle} the first time to ensure the reader can find it in the bibliography. You can also suppress the \enquote{n.d.\@} label by specifying \code{sortyear} or using the \key{nonodate} option.}
\begin{egcite}{(Refugee Convention: art.\@ 24)}
\parencite[24]{refugees}
@@ -6026,7 +6486,7 @@
\chapter{Specialist materials}\label{sec:special}
-\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter}
+\chapterprecis{misc, unpublished, letter, manuscript}
\section{Poems}\label{sec:poem}
@@ -6164,6 +6624,7 @@
\code{act} and \code{scene} (\code{line} is already defined),
though in reality you are probably better off doing it by hand.}
+
\section{Manuscripts}\label{sec:ms}
%<*y>
@@ -6171,8 +6632,8 @@
but support is provided anyway for the sake of completeness.
%</y>
-%<n|m>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
-%<a|y>\spec{Author, Title/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date, Archive, Location, Collection Series, Shelfmark, Folios.}
With \pkg[biblatex]{oxref}, you can enter manuscripts in either of two ways. The first uses the \code{unpublished} entry type.
@@ -6193,7 +6654,7 @@
%<a|y><NHR 18.6.3*\textdagger>
{smithMS23116}
%<n|m>Francis Smith, travel diaries, 1912–7, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
-%<a|y>Smith, F. [1912–7], travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
+%<a|y>Smith, F. (1912–7), travel diaries, British Library, Add. MS 23116.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
%</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6232,7 +6693,7 @@
%<a|y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
{chaundlerMS288}
%<n|m>Thomas Chaundler, \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
-%<a|y>Chaundler, T. [n.d.], \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
+%<a|y>Chaundler, T. (n.d.), \enquote{Collocutiones}, Balliol College, Oxford, MS288.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
%</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6251,7 +6712,7 @@
%<a|y><NHR 18.6.2\textdagger>
{exchequerE311}
%<n|m>exchequer accounts, Dec. 1798, Cheshire Record Office, E311.
-%<a|y>exchequer accounts [1798], Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
+%<a|y>exchequer accounts (1798), Dec., Cheshire Record Office, E311.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
%</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6269,7 +6730,7 @@
%<a|y><NHR 18.6.3\textdagger>
{blcBOX19d}
%<n|m>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes, 12 June 1949, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
-%<a|y>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes [1949], 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
+%<a|y>Bearsden Ladies' Club minutes (1949), 12 June, Bearsden and Milngavie District Libraries, box 19/d.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
%</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6288,7 +6749,7 @@
%<a|y><NHR 18.6.5\textdagger>
{bodMSrawl-d520}
%<n|m>Bodleian Library, Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
-%<a|y>Bodleian Library [n.d.], Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
+%<a|y>Bodleian Library (n.d.), Oxford, MS Rawlinson D. 520, fo. 7.
\tcblower
\begin{Verbatim}
%</n|m|a|y>
@@ -6333,6 +6794,64 @@
\end{egcite}
%</y>
+
+\section{Letters}
+
+These examples relate to letters held personally or online. For letters that
+form part of archival collections, see the section on manuscripts above.
+
+Note that it is usually acceptable to exclude personal communications from
+the reference section, and simply cite them in the text (in which case you may
+not need the \pkg{biblatex} machinery).
+
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor, Date.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+%<n|m><OGS \S15.11.1*>
+%<a|y><OGS \S15.11.1*\textdagger>
+{anon2001pl}
+%<n|m>Personal letter to the author, 2 May 2001.
+%<a|y>Personal letter to the author (2001), 2 May.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at letter{anon2001pl,
+ title = {Personal letter to the author},
+ title+an = {=descriptor},
+ date = {2001-05-02}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+In the absence of any explicit rationale governing whether the date is
+parenthetical, in \pkg[biblatex]{oxref} the presence of a URL
+will trigger the use of parentheses.
+
+%<n|m>\spec{Author, \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+%<a|y>\spec{Author (Year), \enquote{Title}/Descriptor [HowPublished], (Date), OnlineAccess.}
+
+\begin{bibexbox}
+%<n|m><OGS \S15.15.3*>
+%<a|y><OGS \S15.15.3*\textdagger>
+{ritter2001rp}%
+%<n|m>R. M. Ritter, \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@ 2001), \url{ogs at ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+%<a|y>Ritter, R. M. (2001), \enquote{Revised proofs} [email to H. E. Cox], (1 Aug.\@), \url{ogs at ritter.org.uk}, accessed 3 Aug.\@ 2001.
+\tcblower
+\begin{Verbatim}
+%</n|m|a|y>
+ at letter{ritter2001rp,
+ author = {R. M. Ritter},
+ title = {Revised proofs},
+ howpublished = {email to H. E. Cox},
+ date = {2001-08-01},
+ url = {ogs at ritter.org.uk},
+ urldate = {2001-08-03}}
+%<*n|m|a|y>
+\end{Verbatim}
+\end{bibexbox}
+
+
\printbibliography[notcategory=hidden]
%</n|m|a|y>
%</doc|bib>
@@ -6390,7 +6909,8 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\NewBibliographyString{%
- director, performer, reader, conductor,
+ director, performer, reader, conductor, serieseditor, holder, editorcm,
+ directors, performers, readers, conductors, serieseditors, holders, editorcms,
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -6398,7 +6918,7 @@
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
- bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor,
+ bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor, byholder, byeditorcm,
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -6443,7 +6963,7 @@
% \end{itemize}
%
% \begin{macrocode}
- nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded,
+ nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded, filed, issued,
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -6455,6 +6975,14 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
+% \item country names, patents, and patent requests;
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ countryjp, patentjp, patreqjp,
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
% \item borrowed from other styles.
% \end{itemize}
%
@@ -6525,6 +7053,8 @@
\newtoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}\toggletrue{blx at ox@nametitle}%
\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}{#1}}
\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -6728,7 +7258,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% There is no comma before numeric suffixes, but there is before textual
-% ones (e.g. ‘junior’).
+% ones (e.g. \enquote{junior}).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\xpatchbibmacro{name:given-family}%
@@ -6961,7 +7491,7 @@
\finentry}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% We provide options for how to handle the author name ‘Anonymous’.
+% We provide options for how to handle the author name \enquote{Anonymous}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoggle{blx at ox@autoanon}
@@ -6994,7 +7524,7 @@
% The |author| macro is enhanced from the standard version by
% \begin{itemize}
% \item
-% checking if the author name is ‘Anonymous’;
+% checking if the author name is \enquote{Anonymous};
% \item
% including a dash check, to see if the name(s) should be replaced
% with a dash (as in |authortitle| and |authoryear|);
@@ -7049,6 +7579,12 @@
\DeclareFieldFormat{authortype}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% We make the punctuation between a title and \enquote{by [author]} configurable.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\titlebyauthordelim}{\addspace}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% Following |authortitle| and |authoryear|, we redefine the |editor| and
% |editor+others| macros to use a common |bbx:editor| macro. The macro
% we use is the similar to the normal one except we delegate printing editor
@@ -7276,6 +7812,8 @@
\newtoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}
\DeclareBibliographyOption{timefirst}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{timefirst}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}{#1}}
\DeclareEntryOption{timefirst}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}{#1}}
\newbibmacro*{date+time}{%
@@ -7330,6 +7868,23 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% If a date is inferred, it goes in square brackets.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{date}{%
+ \def\currentfield{date}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{origdate}{%
+ \def\currentfield{origdate}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{eventdate}{%
+ \def\currentfield{eventdate}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \subsection{Editions, pages, and other number-like fields}
%
% We let |edition| take a localization key as well as a number.
@@ -7463,7 +8018,6 @@
\do\={\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\=\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
\do\?{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\?\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
\do\_{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\_\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
- \do\@{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\@\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
\do\#{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\#\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
}%
\ifnumgreater{\value{biburlnumpenalty}}{0}
@@ -7546,7 +8100,7 @@
% Subtypes for articles and similar are in square brackets.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,suppperiodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We provide a command for testing if a title is abbreviated. We use the
@@ -7698,8 +8252,16 @@
\newtoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}
\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldundef{issue}}
@@ -7753,7 +8315,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -7822,6 +8384,68 @@
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% The |suppperiodical| driver is just like the |article| one, except the note
+% comes sooner after the title. This is to allow it to be used as a descriptor.
+% Since we're breaking the alias, we need to explicitly replicate the article
+% formatting for the rest of the entry.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{number}{#1}% number of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{series}{% series of a journal
+ \ifinteger{#1}
+ {\mkbibordseries{#1}~\bibstring{jourser}}
+ {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppperiodical}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}\clearfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{suppto}{%
+ \setunit{\addsemicolon\space}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+ \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}%
+ \clearfield{related}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \subsection{Books and works in books}
%
% By default, editors do not appear before the title in book or reference
@@ -7836,15 +8460,6 @@
% however, are set in italics.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
- or
- test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
- }{%
- \mkbibemph{#1}%
- }{%
- \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{title}{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
@@ -7928,6 +8543,22 @@
\printfield{number}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% We provide an option for displaying the series information before, instead of
+% within, the publication block.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{bookseries}[in]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@altbookseries}%
+ }{%
+ \togglefalse{blx at ox@altbookseries}%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{}{%
+ \PackageError{oxref}
+ {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+ {Valid values are 'in' and 'out'.}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% When citing both the first and a later edition, the first one comes
% first, and the later one comes after a semicolon. As per standard
% \pkg{biblatex}, the elements of a single edition are separated by commas
@@ -8009,6 +8640,9 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newbibmacro*{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}{%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldundef{series}}
and
@@ -8028,8 +8662,9 @@
}{}{%
\nopunct
\printtext[publication]{%
- \usebibmacro{series+number}%
- \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
\usebibmacro{edition+publisher+location+date}%
\usebibmacro{copub}}}%
\iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -8044,6 +8679,9 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newbibmacro*{series+number+publisher+location+date}{%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldundef{series}}
and
@@ -8061,8 +8699,9 @@
}{}{%
\nopunct
\printtext[publication]{%
- \usebibmacro{series+number}%
- \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
\usebibmacro{copub}}}%
\iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -8129,7 +8768,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8192,7 +8831,7 @@
}{}{%
\printfield{volume}%
\printfield{part}}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8243,7 +8882,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8261,7 +8900,7 @@
\printfield{volumes}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock%
+ \newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
@@ -8281,9 +8920,62 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1\nopunct}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% Our |suppbook| driver is just like |inbook| except that the note is moved
+% nearer the title so it can be used as a descriptor.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% We also provide a |bookinbook| driver that handles \code{origdate}
% differently.
%
@@ -8294,7 +8986,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8313,7 +9005,7 @@
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{note}%
\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{series+number+publisher+location+date}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
\newunit\newblock
@@ -8444,7 +9136,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8482,6 +9174,58 @@
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% Our |suppcollection| driver is just like |incollection| except that the note
+% is moved nearer the title so it can be used as a descriptor.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppcollection]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppcollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{bookeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit\newblock%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% Unlike the standard styles, we provide a separate driver for
% |reference|. It is just like |book| except that |edition| is given
% directly after the title.
@@ -8495,7 +9239,7 @@
\usebibmacro{title}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8547,7 +9291,7 @@
\printfield{part}}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -8599,7 +9343,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\iffieldundef{editor}{}{%
@@ -8655,8 +9399,7 @@
%
% In our version of the |event+venue+date| macro, the venue and date
% are set off with commas respectively instead of
-% parentheses. A bit of jiggery-pokery is used to make the colon italic
-% if it follows italic text.
+% parentheses.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewbibmacro*{event+venue+date}{%
@@ -8663,18 +9406,10 @@
\printfield{eventtitle}%
\newunit
\printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldundef{venue}}
- and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
- }{}{%
- \iffieldundef{eventtitle}{%
- \setunit{\mkbibemph{\addcomma}\space}%
- }{%
- \newunit}%
- \printfield{venue}%
- \newunit%
- \printeventdate}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{venue}%
+ \newunit%
+ \printeventdate%
\newunit}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -8754,7 +9489,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -8825,8 +9560,7 @@
%
% Our version of the |institution+location+date| macro is just like the
% standard one except it is wrapped in parentheses, and the preceding
-% punctuation is therefore suppressed. This is used by the standard
-% |thesis| driver, which also works well for us, and the |report| driver.
+% punctuation is therefore suppressed. This is used by the |report| driver.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{%
@@ -8873,9 +9607,28 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoggle{blx at ox@altthesis}
+\newtoggle{blx at ox@plainthesis}
+\DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{plain}{#1}
\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{altthesis}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@altthesis}{#1}
}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{thesis}[out]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{plain}{%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@altthesis}%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@plainthesis}%
+ \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{plain}%
+ }{%
+ \togglefalse{blx at ox@plainthesis}%
+ \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@altthesis}%
+ }{%
+ \togglefalse{blx at ox@altthesis}%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{}{%
+ \PackageError{oxref}
+ {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+ {Valid values are 'in', 'out', and 'plain'.}}}}}
\newbibmacro*{type+institution+location+date}{%
\iftoggle{blx at ox@altthesis}{%
\ifboolexpr{
@@ -8891,8 +9644,8 @@
and
test {\iffieldundef{month}}
}{}{%
- \nopunct
- \printtext[publication]{%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@plainthesis}{}{\nopunct}%
+ \printtext[thesis:publication]{%
\printfield{type}%
\setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
\printlist{location}%
@@ -8987,7 +9740,7 @@
{\printfield{volume}%
\printfield{part}}
{}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{version}%
@@ -9034,25 +9787,150 @@
}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% We give booklet entries descriptor support.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[booklet]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% With patents, the titles are italic and the patent type is not abbreviated.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{title}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{type}{\ifbibstring{#1}{\biblstring{#1}}{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |holder|, |origdate| and |date| fields have explicit signposting; the
+% latter two use |origdatetype| and |datetype|, with some sensible defaults.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareNameAlias{byholder}{default}
+\renewbibmacro*{byholder}{%
+ \ifnameundef{holder}{}{%
+ \bibstring{byholder}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printnames[byholder]{holder}}}
+\newbibmacro*{location+dates}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{location}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+ }{}{%
+ \nopunct
+ \printtext[publication]{%
+ \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}%
+ \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+ }{}{%
+ \iffieldundef{origdatetype}{%
+ \bibstring{filed}
+ }{
+ \printfield{origdatetype}}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+ \usebibmacro{origdate+time}%
+ \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+ }{}{%
+ \iffieldundef{datetype}{%
+ \bibstring{issued}%
+ }{
+ \printfield{datetype}}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |patent| driver differs from the regular one by having |note| moved
+% further forward, and having a publication block consisting of |location|,
+% |origdate| and |date|.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{location+dates}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Direct use of the |manual| entry type is not encouraged, but it serves as a
+% basis for other entry types, notably standards, datasets, and software.
% The main change to the |manual| driver compared to the standard style is
% that |type|, |series|, |number|, |edition| and |organization| are moved into
-% the publication information block with |publisher|, |location| and |date|;
+% the publication information block with |publisher|, |location| and |date|.
+% Note that standards will put the |number| field at the head of the reference
+% if there is no author.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
\usebibmacro{bibindex}%
\usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifentrytype{standard}}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifnameundef{author}}
+ or
+ not test \ifuseauthor )
+ and
+ not test {\iffieldundef{number}}
+ }{%
+ \printfield{number}\clearfield{number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ }{}%
\usebibmacro{author/editor}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \ifentrytype{software}{%
+ \usebibmacro{title+version}%
+ }{%
+ \usebibmacro{title}}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
\newunit
- \printfield{version}%
+ \ifentrytype{software}{}{%
+ \newunit\printfield{version}}%
\newunit
\printfield{note}%
\newunit\newblock
@@ -9077,6 +9955,8 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{standard}{manual}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[standard]{useeditor=false}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Audiovisual materials}
@@ -9113,11 +9993,11 @@
and
test {\iffieldundef{month}}
and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventseason}}
+ test {\iffieldundef{origseason}}
and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventmonth}}
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
and
test {\iffieldundef{hour}}
}{}{%
@@ -9187,7 +10067,7 @@
}{}%
\setunit{\addspace}
\usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
@@ -9239,7 +10119,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -9371,13 +10251,92 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% The examples of image references in \emph{New Hart's Rules} are all for online
-% images, and the |online| driver seems to work well for them. The main
-% difference is that they use a different format for the title.
+% The |performance| driver is similar to the |audio| driver, but instead of a
+% publication block, it displays a set of event-related fields. With a bit of
+% generosity, it can also work for artworks and images.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{online}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[image]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{performance}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+ \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{includes}{%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}%
+ \clearfield{related}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}
+ \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+ }{}{%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+ \printtext[publication]{\usebibmacro{origdate+time}}}
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{post-byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{performance}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{artwork}{performance}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here is the macro used for printing the event location and date for
+% performances and exhibitions.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewbibmacro*{event+venue+location+date}{%
+ \printfield{eventtitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{institution}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{venue}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{location}%
+ \newunit%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+ }{\printeventdate}{\usebibmacro{date+time}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -9389,7 +10348,7 @@
% are written in roman text within quotes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online]{title}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{title}{%
\def\currentfield{title}%
\iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
\undef\currentfield}
@@ -9437,7 +10396,7 @@
\usebibmacro{maintitle}
\setunit{\addspace}%
\usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -9502,45 +10461,10 @@
\DeclareFieldFormat[software]{urldate}{\bibstring{urldown}\space#1}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% The software driver is based loosely on the manual driver.
+% The software driver is a variant of the manual driver.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{software}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{title+version}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{type+series+number+edition+organization+publisher+location+date}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Datasets}
@@ -10577,6 +11501,8 @@
test {\ifnameundef{author}}
and
test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{label}}
}{}{\usebibmacro{date}}}
\newbibmacro{dating}{%
\ifboolexpr{(
@@ -10583,6 +11509,8 @@
test {\ifnameundef{author}}
and
test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{label}}
) or
test {\iffieldundef{year}}
}{%
@@ -10662,7 +11590,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{howpublished}%
@@ -10723,13 +11651,13 @@
\usebibmacro{author}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
\printfield{howpublished}%
\newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
\iftoggle{blx at ox@ms}{%
\usebibmacro{manuscript:date}%
\newunit\newblock
@@ -10757,9 +11685,22 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
-
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \subsection{Letters}
+%
+% The driver for letters is similar to the one for other unpublished materials.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{letter}{unpublished}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{date}{%
+ \iffieldundef{url}{#1}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \subsection{Related entries}
%
% We make the punctuation before related items configurable in remaining drivers
@@ -10780,13 +11721,6 @@
\setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
\iftoggle{bbx:related}
}{}{}
-\xpatchbibdriver{patent}{%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{%
- \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{}{}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We provide an option for setting the relatedtype punctuation.
@@ -10804,6 +11738,18 @@
}{%
Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
+ \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{space}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\addspace}%
+ }{%
+ \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\csuse{add#1}\space}}%
+ }{%
+ \PackageError{biblatex-oxref}{%
+ Invalid option 'relationpunct=#1'%
+ }{%
+ Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
+ 'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
\newtoggle{blx at ox@relpunctset}
\DeclareEntryOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
\ifcsdef{add#1}{%
@@ -10977,7 +11923,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -11032,7 +11978,7 @@
%
% \subsubsection{Related editions}
%
-% This macro is based on the ‘bytranslator’ one, but more general.
+% This macro is based on the \enquote{bytranslator} one, but more general.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newbibmacro*{related:editedas}[1]{%
@@ -11245,9 +12191,25 @@
}
% \end{macrocode}
%
+% \subsubsection{Standards}
+%
+% The purpose of this map is to move the number to the head of the reference
+% in the absence of an author, and try to fix the sorting accordingly.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \map[overwrite=false]{
+ \pertype{standard}
+ \step[notfield=author,
+ fieldsource=number,
+ final]
+ \step[fieldset=sortkey,
+ origfieldval]
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% \subsubsection{Audiovisual materials}
%
-% For audiovisual materials, |origdatetype| defaults to ‘recorded’.
+% For audiovisual materials, |origdatetype| defaults to \enquote{recorded}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\map[overwrite=false]{
@@ -11546,8 +12508,8 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions
- [proceedings,report,audio,music,movie,video,manuscript,unpublished,review]%
- {useeditor=false}
+ [proceedings,report,artwork,audio,image,music,movie,performance,video,%
+ manuscript,unpublished,review]{useeditor=false}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \iffalse %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
@@ -11781,6 +12743,13 @@
{Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
{Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{mergedate}[true]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx at opt@mergedate@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx at opt@mergedate@#1}}
+ {\PackageError{biblatex}
+ {Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
+ {Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
+ 'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The various values affect the definition of the following macro, used at
@@ -11789,6 +12758,16 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
\providebibmacro*{date+extradate}{}
\DeclareFieldFormat{datelabel}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labeldate}{%
+ \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \def\currentfield{date}%
+ }{%
+ \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+ \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}date}%
+ }{%
+ \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% On a related note, the |labeldate| uses the |origdate| if provided in
@@ -11834,8 +12813,28 @@
\ifboolexpr{%
not test {\iffieldundef{labeldatesource}}
and test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also provide a wrapper around \cs{printlabeldateextra} that does nothing
+% if the label date is the `nodate' literal \emph{and} |sortyear| is defined.
+% Sadly |sortyear| is consumed before we get to this point, so we need a proxy
+% toggle.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\newbibmacro*{labeldate}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+ and
+ togl {blx at ox@nonodate}
+ }{}{\printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
-
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Here we provide the various possible definitions. The |authoryear|
@@ -11865,23 +12864,23 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at maximum{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{%
- \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{%
\printfield{issue}\clearfield{issue}%
\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printdateextra
- \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ \printdateextra}%
+ \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ }{%
+ \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{%
+ \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
}{%
- \iflabeldateisanydate{%
- \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
- }{%
- \printlabeldateextra
- \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
- }}}}}}
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+ \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -11894,21 +12893,20 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at compact{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{%
- \iflabeldateisdate{%
- \printdateextra
- \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{\printdateextra}%
+ \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ }{%
+ \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{%
+ \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
}{%
- \iflabeldateisanydate{%
- \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
- }{%
- \printlabeldateextra
- \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
- }}}}}}
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+ \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -11922,7 +12920,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at year{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisdate{%
\clearfield{year}
}{%
@@ -11944,7 +12942,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at basic{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisdate{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -11972,7 +12970,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at minimum{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisdate{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -12004,7 +13002,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at false{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisanydate{}{%
\iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
}}}}
@@ -12388,9 +13386,17 @@
% the equivalent information in the bibliography entry.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{citetitle}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
+ or
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+ image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
\def\currentfield{title}%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
@@ -12401,6 +13407,72 @@
)
}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
\undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+ image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[audio,music]{citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{podcast}{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[movie,video]{citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{episode}}
+ or
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{clip}}
+ or
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{webcast}}
+ }{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[misc]%
+ {citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{in}{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}%
+ }}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -12426,17 +13498,6 @@
%
% \subsection{Manuscripts}
%
-% The dates for manuscripts should not really be in parentheses, but it
-% looks really odd to have them bare, when compared to other entries.
-% As a compromise, we use square brackets.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript]{datelabel}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{datelabel}{%
- \iftoggle{blx at ox@ms}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
-\renewbibmacro*{manuscript:date}{\usebibmacro{date}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
% We include the |library| field as a fallback title.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -12446,6 +13507,51 @@
\field{maintitle}
\field{library}
}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Source maps}
+%
+% We use the source mapping capabilities of Biber to fix the following issues.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareStyleSourcemap{%
+ \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Suppressing a \enquote{nodate} label}
+%
+% Unless already set, the \key{nonodate} option is inserted if |sortyear| is
+% used. We accomplish this with source maps; the first one works where options
+% (not including |nonodate|) have been set, the second where no options have
+% been set.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \map[overwrite=true]{
+ \step[notmatch=\regexp{nonodate}, fieldsource=options, final]
+ \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+ \step[fieldset=options, append, fieldvalue={,nonodate}]
+ }
+ \map[overwrite=true]{
+ \step[notfield=options, final]
+ \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+ \step[fieldset=options, fieldvalue={nonodate}]
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Standards}
+%
+% The purpose of this map is to change the number into a label in the absence
+% of an author, so that the citations come out right and the date is positioned
+% correctly.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \map[overwrite=false]{
+ \pertype{standard}
+ \step[notfield=author,
+ fieldsource=number,
+ fieldtarget=label]
+ }
+}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -12482,41 +13588,16 @@
}{%
\csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at maximum}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at compact}{%
\csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}
}{%
\csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at compact}{%
+\xpatchbibmacro{labeldate}{%
\printlabeldateextra
}{%
\printlabeldate
}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at year}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at basic}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at minimum}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at false}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mergedate}
% \end{macrocode}
@@ -12645,19 +13726,18 @@
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{uniquename=init}
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% We patch it with our version of year range compression.
+% We provide a slightly different labeldate macro that obeys the \code{nonodate}
+% option.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
-\xpatchbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
- \printfield{labelendyear}%
-}{%
- \iffieldundef{extradate}{%
- \blx at ox@compyear
- {\thefield{labelyear}}%
- {\thefield{labelendyear}}%
- }{%
- \printfield{labelendyear}}%
-}{}{}
+\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
+ or
+ ( test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+ and
+ togl {blx at ox@nonodate} )
+ }{}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% We insert anonymous author handling into |cite|.
@@ -12681,7 +13761,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The name and year are usually separated by a space, but if the date is
-% replaced by a word (e.g. ‘forthcoming’, ‘n.d.’), they are separated by
+% replaced by a word (e.g. \enquote{forthcoming}, \enquote{n.d.}), they are separated by
% a comma.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -12699,6 +13779,7 @@
% non-compressed citations.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -12717,7 +13798,7 @@
%
% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19}
%
-% The standard |numeric| style works without further adjustment.
+% The standard |numeric| style works, needing only a little configuration.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp}
@@ -12727,6 +13808,7 @@
% non-compressed citations.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -12745,7 +13827,7 @@
%
% \setcounter{FancyVerbLine}{19}
%
-% The standard |alphabetic| style works without further adjustment.
+% The standard |alphabetic| style works, needing only a little configuration.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\RequireCitationStyle{alphabetic}
@@ -12755,6 +13837,7 @@
% non-compressed citations.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
% \end{macrocode}
%
@@ -12775,7 +13858,7 @@
% This code is appended to all the citation style files.
%
% We fix the |textcite| macro so if the \key{anon} option is set to \val{long}
-% or \val{short}, a value of ‘Anonymous’ is replaced by the bibstring.
+% or \val{short}, a value of \enquote{Anonymous} is replaced by the bibstring.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
@@ -12836,7 +13919,7 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% The |rawauthor| field is used internally for checking whether an
-% the name given in the |author| field is a keyword meaning ‘anonymous’.
+% the name given in the |author| field is a keyword meaning \enquote{anonymous}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{rawauthor}
@@ -12921,9 +14004,19 @@
%
% \begin{macrocode}
director = {{director}{dir\adddot}},
+ directors = {{directors}{dirs\adddot}},
performer = {{}{}},
+ performers = {{}{}},
reader = {{reader}{reader}},
+ readers = {{readers}{readers}},
conductor = {{conductor}{cond\adddot}},
+ conductors = {{conductors}{cond\adddot}},
+ serieseditor = {{series editor}{ser\adddotspace ed\adddot}},
+ serieseditors = {{series editors}{ser\adddotspace eds\adddot}},
+ holder = {{holder}{holder}},
+ holders = {{holders}{holders}},
+ editorcm = {{editor and compiler}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
+ editorcms = {{editors and compilers}{eds\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -12936,6 +14029,8 @@
byreader = {{read by}{read by}},
byconductor = {{conducted by}{cond\adddot}},
byserieseditor = {{edited by}{ed\adddot}},
+ byholder = {{held by}{held by}},
+ byeditorcm = {{edited and compiled by}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -12945,7 +14040,7 @@
% \begin{macrocode}
facsimile = {{facsimile edition}{facs\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
revised = {{revised edition}{rev\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
- revisedenlarged = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace ane enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
+ revisedenlarged = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace and enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
revisedreprint = {{revised reprint}{rev\adddotspace repr\adddot}},
suppto = {{Supplement to}{Supplement to}},
equals = {{=}{=}},
@@ -13029,6 +14124,8 @@
modified = {{last modified}{last modified}},
recorded = {{recorded}{recorded}},
uploaded = {{uploaded}{uploaded}},
+ filed = {{filed}{filed}},
+ issued = {{issued}{issued}},
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
@@ -13042,6 +14139,16 @@
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Country names, patents, and patent requests,
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ countryjp = {{Japan}{JP}},
+ patentjp = {{Japanese patent}{Japanese pat.\adddot}},
+ patreqjp = {{Japanese patent request}{Japanese pat.\adddot req.\adddot}},
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{itemize}
% \item These are borrowed from other styles.
% \end{itemize}
%
@@ -13071,8 +14178,8 @@
% Many of these are guesses extrapolated from what is given.
%
% The roles expressed as functions do not need adjusting. The roles
-% expressed as actions do not typically end in ‘by’ when abbreviated;
-% the ‘with’ parts go first when abbreviated if there is more than one
+% expressed as actions do not typically end in \enquote{by} when abbreviated;
+% the \enquote{with} parts go first when abbreviated if there is more than one
% editorial role (at least, that is one way of interpreting the examples).
%
% \begin{macrocode}
@@ -13184,7 +14291,7 @@
origpubin = {{originally published in}{originally pub\adddot}},
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% There is also a different abbreviation for ‘paragraph’.
+% There is also a different abbreviation for \enquote{paragraph}.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
paragraph = {{paragraph}{para\adddot}},
@@ -13191,14 +14298,14 @@
paragraphs = {{paragraphs}{paras\adddot}},
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% \emph{New Hart's Rules} uses ‘accessed’ for URL dates.
+% \emph{New Hart's Rules} uses \enquote{accessed} for URL dates.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
urlseen = {{accessed}{accessed}},
% \end{macrocode}
%
-% Scholarly citation terms are abbreviated. Oxford style is to use ‘henceforth’
-% for shorthands and ‘at’ to cite a page within a range.
+% Scholarly citation terms are abbreviated. Oxford style is to use \enquote{henceforth}
+% for shorthands and \enquote{at} to cite a page within a range.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
idem = {{idem}{id\adddot}},
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/american-oxref.lbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{american-oxref.lbx}
[\Version\space American English conventions required by the biblatex-oxref styles]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/british-oxref.lbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{british-oxref.lbx}
[\Version\space British English conventions required by the biblatex-oxref styles]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/english-oxref.lbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{english-oxref.lbx}
[\Version\space Generic English conventions required by the biblatex-oxref styles]
@@ -33,17 +33,29 @@
\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
inherit = {english},
director = {{director}{dir\adddot}},
+ directors = {{directors}{dirs\adddot}},
performer = {{}{}},
+ performers = {{}{}},
reader = {{reader}{reader}},
+ readers = {{readers}{readers}},
conductor = {{conductor}{cond\adddot}},
+ conductors = {{conductors}{cond\adddot}},
+ serieseditor = {{series editor}{ser\adddotspace ed\adddot}},
+ serieseditors = {{series editors}{ser\adddotspace eds\adddot}},
+ holder = {{holder}{holder}},
+ holders = {{holders}{holders}},
+ editorcm = {{editor and compiler}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
+ editorcms = {{editors and compilers}{eds\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
byperformer = {{}{}},
bydirector = {{directed by}{dir\adddot}},
byreader = {{read by}{read by}},
byconductor = {{conducted by}{cond\adddot}},
byserieseditor = {{edited by}{ed\adddot}},
+ byholder = {{held by}{held by}},
+ byeditorcm = {{edited and compiled by}{ed\adddotspace and comp\adddot}},
facsimile = {{facsimile edition}{facs\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
revised = {{revised edition}{rev\adddotspace edn\adddot}},
- revisedenlarged = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace ane enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
+ revisedenlarged = {{revised and enlarged edition}{rev\adddotspace and enl\addotspace edn\adddot}},
revisedreprint = {{revised reprint}{rev\adddotspace repr\adddot}},
suppto = {{Supplement to}{Supplement to}},
equals = {{=}{=}},
@@ -99,9 +111,14 @@
modified = {{last modified}{last modified}},
recorded = {{recorded}{recorded}},
uploaded = {{uploaded}{uploaded}},
+ filed = {{filed}{filed}},
+ issued = {{issued}{issued}},
anon = {{Anonymous}{Anon\adddot}},
pseudo = {{Pseudo-}{Ps\adddot-}},
urldown = {{downloaded}{downloaded}},
+ countryjp = {{Japan}{JP}},
+ patentjp = {{Japanese patent}{Japanese pat.\adddot}},
+ patreqjp = {{Japanese patent request}{Japanese pat.\adddot req.\adddot}},
1column = {{one column}{1\addnbspace col\adddot}},
2column = {{two columns}{2\addnbspace col\adddot}},
inflayer = {{inferior layer}{inf\adddotspace lay\adddot}},
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.bbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxalph.bbx}
[\Version\space Alphabetic bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
@@ -28,41 +28,16 @@
}{%
\csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at maximum}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at compact}{%
\csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}
}{%
\csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}date}
}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at compact}{%
+\xpatchbibmacro{labeldate}{%
\printlabeldateextra
}{%
\printlabeldate
}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at year}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at basic}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at minimum}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
-\xpatchcmd{\bbx at opt@mergedate at false}{%
- \printlabeldateextra
-}{%
- \printlabeldate
-}{}{}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mergedate}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{labelalpha,sorting=anyt}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.cbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,11 +13,12 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxalph.cbx}
[\Version\space Alphabetic citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\RequireCitationStyle{alphabetic}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space}
\xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxalph.dbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxalph.dbx}
[\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.bbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxnotes.bbx}
[\Version\space Footnote-based bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.cbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxnotes.cbx}
[\Version\space Footnote-based citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnotes.dbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxnotes.dbx}
[\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.bbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxnum.bbx}
[\Version\space Numeric bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.cbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,11 +13,12 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxnum.cbx}
[\Version\space Numeric citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space}
\xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxnum.dbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxnum.dbx}
[\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxref.bbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxref.bbx}
[\Version\space Base settings for bibliography styles inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
@@ -22,8 +22,9 @@
\RequirePackage{graphicx}
\DeclareLanguageMappingSuffix{-oxref}
\NewBibliographyString{%
- director, performer, reader, conductor,
- bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor,
+ director, performer, reader, conductor, serieseditor, holder, editorcm,
+ directors, performers, readers, conductors, serieseditors, holders, editorcms,
+ bydirector, byperformer, byreader, byconductor, byserieseditor, byholder, byeditorcm,
facsimile, revised, revisedenlarged, revisedreprint, suppto, equals, original,
inpressin,
book, books, canto, cantos, stanza, stanzas, act, acts, scene, scenes, folio, folios,
@@ -33,8 +34,9 @@
articletotal, articletotals, clausetotal, clausetotals, regulationtotal,
regulationtotals, ruletotal, ruletotals,
facebook, tweet, podcast, clip, webcast, poster,
- nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded,
+ nolocation, modified, recorded, uploaded, filed, issued,
anon, pseudo, urldown,
+ countryjp, patentjp, patreqjp,
1column, 2column, inflayer, suplayer, paper, papyrus, pergament,
eucase, eujoinedcases, commissiondecision, application,
order, bill, draft, opened, signed, adopted, inforce,
@@ -62,6 +64,8 @@
\newtoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}\toggletrue{blx at ox@nametitle}%
\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}{#1}}
\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{usenametitles}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@nametitle}{#1}}
\newbibmacro*{name:title-given-family}[5]{%
@@ -455,6 +459,7 @@
\setunit{\addspace}}}%
{\global\undef\bbx at lasthash}}
\DeclareFieldFormat{authortype}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\newcommand{\titlebyauthordelim}{\addspace}
\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
\usebibmacro{bbx:editor}{editorstrg}}
\renewbibmacro*{editor+others}{%
@@ -611,6 +616,8 @@
\newtoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}
\DeclareBibliographyOption{timefirst}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{timefirst}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}{#1}}
\DeclareEntryOption{timefirst}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@timefirst}{#1}}
\newbibmacro*{date+time}{%
@@ -657,6 +664,18 @@
\setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
\printorigtime}%
}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{date}{%
+ \def\currentfield{date}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{origdate}{%
+ \def\currentfield{origdate}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{eventdate}{%
+ \def\currentfield{eventdate}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
\xpatchfieldformat{edition}{%
#1\isdot
}{%
@@ -733,7 +752,6 @@
\do\={\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\=\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
\do\?{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\mathchar`\?\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
\do\_{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\_\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
- \do\@{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\@\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
\do\#{\mathbin{}\mskip-\Urlmuskip\#\mskip\Urlmuskip}%
}%
\ifnumgreater{\value{biburlnumpenalty}}{0}
@@ -780,7 +798,7 @@
\DeclareFieldFormat{pubstate}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
\DeclareFieldFormat{howpublished}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
\DeclareFieldFormat[misc,unpublished]{howpublished}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical,suppperiodical,review]{entrysubtype}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
\newcommand*{\blx at ox@abbrevstring}{%
A\^{A}BCDEFG\u{G}HI\.{I}\^{I}JKLMNO\"{O}\^{O}PQRSTU\"{U}\^{U}VWXYZ.}%
\AtBeginDocument{
@@ -884,8 +902,16 @@
\newtoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}
\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{varissuedate}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{issuedate-plain}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@varissuedate}{#1}}
\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldundef{issue}}
@@ -928,7 +954,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -990,16 +1016,61 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{number}{#1}% number of a journal
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical]{series}{% series of a journal
+ \ifinteger{#1}
+ {\mkbibordseries{#1}~\bibstring{jourser}}
+ {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppperiodical}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}\clearfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{suppto}{%
+ \setunit{\addsemicolon\space}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+ \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}%
+ \clearfield{related}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[book,mvbook,reference,mvreference]{useeditor=false,usetranslator=false}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
- or
- test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
- }{%
- \mkbibemph{#1}%
- }{%
- \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{title}{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
@@ -1045,6 +1116,16 @@
\usebibmacro{byserieseditor}%
\setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
\printfield{number}}
+\newtoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{bookseries}[in]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@altbookseries}%
+ }{%
+ \togglefalse{blx at ox@altbookseries}%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{}{%
+ \PackageError{oxref}
+ {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+ {Valid values are 'in' and 'out'.}}}}
\newcounter{locpubpairs}
\newbibmacro*{edition+publisher+location+date}{%
\printlist{origlocation}%
@@ -1103,6 +1184,9 @@
\usebibmacro{date}%
}
\newbibmacro*{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}{%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldundef{series}}
and
@@ -1122,8 +1206,9 @@
}{}{%
\nopunct
\printtext[publication]{%
- \usebibmacro{series+number}%
- \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
\usebibmacro{edition+publisher+location+date}%
\usebibmacro{copub}}}%
\iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -1131,6 +1216,9 @@
\usebibmacro{origpub}%
}
\newbibmacro*{series+number+publisher+location+date}{%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock}{}%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldundef{series}}
and
@@ -1148,8 +1236,9 @@
}{}{%
\nopunct
\printtext[publication]{%
- \usebibmacro{series+number}%
- \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@altbookseries}{}{%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}%
+ \setunit{\addsemicolon\addspace}}%
\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
\usebibmacro{copub}}}%
\iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{copub}{\clearfield{related}}%
@@ -1186,7 +1275,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1232,7 +1321,7 @@
}{}{%
\printfield{volume}%
\printfield{part}}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1277,7 +1366,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1295,7 +1384,7 @@
\printfield{volumes}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock%
+ \newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
@@ -1315,7 +1404,54 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{#1\nopunct}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppbook]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
\DeclareBibliographyDriver{bookinbook}{%
\usebibmacro{bibindex}%
\usebibmacro{begentry}%
@@ -1322,7 +1458,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1341,7 +1477,7 @@
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{note}%
\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{series+number+publisher+location+date}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
\newunit\newblock
@@ -1451,7 +1587,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1487,6 +1623,52 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppcollection]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibemph{#1}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{suppcollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{bookeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit\newblock%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number+edition+publisher+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
\DeclareBibliographyDriver{reference}{%
\usebibmacro{bibindex}%
\usebibmacro{begentry}%
@@ -1495,7 +1677,7 @@
\usebibmacro{title}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1541,7 +1723,7 @@
\printfield{part}}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -1586,7 +1768,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\iffieldundef{editor}{}{%
@@ -1634,18 +1816,10 @@
\printfield{eventtitle}%
\newunit
\printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldundef{venue}}
- and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
- }{}{%
- \iffieldundef{eventtitle}{%
- \setunit{\mkbibemph{\addcomma}\space}%
- }{%
- \newunit}%
- \printfield{venue}%
- \newunit%
- \printeventdate}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{venue}%
+ \newunit%
+ \printeventdate%
\newunit}
\DeclareBibliographyDriver{proceedings}{%
\usebibmacro{bibindex}%
@@ -1696,7 +1870,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -1791,9 +1965,28 @@
\setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
\usebibmacro{date}}}}
\newtoggle{blx at ox@altthesis}
+\newtoggle{blx at ox@plainthesis}
+\DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{plain}{#1}
\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{altthesis}[true]{%
\settoggle{blx at ox@altthesis}{#1}
}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{thesis}[out]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{plain}{%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@altthesis}%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@plainthesis}%
+ \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{plain}%
+ }{%
+ \togglefalse{blx at ox@plainthesis}%
+ \DeclareFieldAlias{thesis:publication}{publication}%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{in}{%
+ \toggletrue{blx at ox@altthesis}%
+ }{%
+ \togglefalse{blx at ox@altthesis}%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{out}{}{%
+ \PackageError{oxref}
+ {Invalid option 'bookseries=#1'}
+ {Valid values are 'in', 'out', and 'plain'.}}}}}
\newbibmacro*{type+institution+location+date}{%
\iftoggle{blx at ox@altthesis}{%
\ifboolexpr{
@@ -1809,8 +2002,8 @@
and
test {\iffieldundef{month}}
}{}{%
- \nopunct
- \printtext[publication]{%
+ \iftoggle{blx at ox@plainthesis}{}{\nopunct}%
+ \printtext[thesis:publication]{%
\printfield{type}%
\setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
\printlist{location}%
@@ -1880,7 +2073,7 @@
{\printfield{volume}%
\printfield{part}}
{}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{version}%
@@ -1920,20 +2113,118 @@
}{%
\usebibmacro{type+institution+location+date}%
}{}{}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[booklet]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{title}{\mkbibemph{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[patent]{type}{\ifbibstring{#1}{\biblstring{#1}}{#1}}
+\DeclareNameAlias{byholder}{default}
+\renewbibmacro*{byholder}{%
+ \ifnameundef{holder}{}{%
+ \bibstring{byholder}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printnames[byholder]{holder}}}
+\newbibmacro*{location+dates}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{location}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+ }{}{%
+ \nopunct
+ \printtext[publication]{%
+ \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}%
+ \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+ }{}{%
+ \iffieldundef{origdatetype}{%
+ \bibstring{filed}
+ }{
+ \printfield{origdatetype}}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+ \usebibmacro{origdate+time}%
+ \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+ }{}{%
+ \iffieldundef{datetype}{%
+ \bibstring{issued}%
+ }{
+ \printfield{datetype}}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}}}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{location+dates}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
\usebibmacro{bibindex}%
\usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifentrytype{standard}}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifnameundef{author}}
+ or
+ not test \ifuseauthor )
+ and
+ not test {\iffieldundef{number}}
+ }{%
+ \printfield{number}\clearfield{number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ }{}%
\usebibmacro{author/editor}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \ifentrytype{software}{%
+ \usebibmacro{title+version}%
+ }{%
+ \usebibmacro{title}}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
\newunit
- \printfield{version}%
+ \ifentrytype{software}{}{%
+ \newunit\printfield{version}}%
\newunit
\printfield{note}%
\newunit\newblock
@@ -1958,6 +2249,8 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{standard}{manual}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions[standard]{useeditor=false}
\newbibmacro*{publisher+type+series+number+date}{%
\iffieldundef{number}{}{%
\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
@@ -1982,11 +2275,11 @@
and
test {\iffieldundef{month}}
and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventyear}}
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventseason}}
+ test {\iffieldundef{origseason}}
and
- test {\iffieldundef{eventmonth}}
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
and
test {\iffieldundef{hour}}
}{}{%
@@ -2044,7 +2337,7 @@
}{}%
\setunit{\addspace}
\usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
@@ -2085,7 +2378,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{in:}%
@@ -2195,10 +2488,83 @@
\mkbibemph{#1}}}%
\undef\currentfield}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{online}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[image]{title}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{performance}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{author}%
+ \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+ \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{includes}{%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}{%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}%
+ \clearfield{related}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}
+ \usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pre-byeditor+others}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{origyear}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{origmonth}}
+ }{}{%
+ \setunit{\addspace}\newblock
+ \printtext[publication]{\usebibmacro{origdate+time}}}
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{post-byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+ {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+ \usebibmacro{related}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{image}{performance}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{artwork}{performance}
+\renewbibmacro*{event+venue+location+date}{%
+ \printfield{eventtitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{eventtitleaddon}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{institution}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{venue}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{location}%
+ \newunit%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{year}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{month}}
+ }{\printeventdate}{\usebibmacro{date+time}}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online]{title}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{title}{%
\def\currentfield{title}%
\iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
\undef\currentfield}
@@ -2222,7 +2588,7 @@
\usebibmacro{maintitle}
\setunit{\addspace}%
\usebibmacro{onlinetype}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
@@ -2272,42 +2638,7 @@
}
\DeclareFieldFormat[software]{version}{\mkbibparens{\bibstring{version}~#1}}
\DeclareFieldFormat[software]{urldate}{\bibstring{urldown}\space#1}
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{software}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{title+version}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{type+series+number+edition+organization+publisher+location+date}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
\newtoggle{bbx:scotstyle}
\DeclareEntryOption{scottish-style}[true]{%
@@ -3210,6 +3541,8 @@
test {\ifnameundef{author}}
and
test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{label}}
}{}{\usebibmacro{date}}}
\newbibmacro{dating}{%
\ifboolexpr{(
@@ -3216,6 +3549,8 @@
test {\ifnameundef{author}}
and
test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{label}}
) or
test {\iffieldundef{year}}
}{%
@@ -3275,7 +3610,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\printfield{howpublished}%
@@ -3323,13 +3658,13 @@
\usebibmacro{author}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
\printfield{howpublished}%
\newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
\iftoggle{blx at ox@ms}{%
\usebibmacro{manuscript:date}%
\newunit\newblock
@@ -3357,7 +3692,13 @@
\usebibmacro{related}}
{}%
\usebibmacro{finentry}}
-
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{letter}{unpublished}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{title}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \iffieldannotation{descriptor}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[letter]{date}{%
+ \iffieldundef{url}{#1}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
\xpatchbibdriver{booklet}{%
\newunit\newblock
\iftoggle{bbx:related}
@@ -3372,13 +3713,6 @@
\setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
\iftoggle{bbx:related}
}{}{}
-\xpatchbibdriver{patent}{%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{%
- \setunit{\relatedtypepunct}\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
-}{}{}
\DeclareBibliographyOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
\ifcsdef{add#1}{%
\ifstrequal{#1}{space}{%
@@ -3391,6 +3725,18 @@
}{%
Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
+ \ifcsdef{add#1}{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{space}{%
+ \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\addspace}%
+ }{%
+ \renewcommand*{\relatedtypepunct}{\csuse{add#1}\space}}%
+ }{%
+ \PackageError{biblatex-oxref}{%
+ Invalid option 'relationpunct=#1'%
+ }{%
+ Valid values are 'dot', 'comma', 'semicolon', 'colon',\MessageBreak
+ 'period', 'exclam', 'question', and 'space'.}}}
\newtoggle{blx at ox@relpunctset}
\DeclareEntryOption{relationpunct}[semicolon]{%
\ifcsdef{add#1}{%
@@ -3507,7 +3853,7 @@
\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
\setunit{\printdelim{nametitledelim}}\newblock
\usebibmacro{title}%
- \newunit\newblock
+ \setunit{\titlebyauthordelim}\newblock
\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
\newunit\newblock
\usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
@@ -3703,6 +4049,14 @@
fieldvalue={=translator}]
}
\map[overwrite=false]{
+ \pertype{standard}
+ \step[notfield=author,
+ fieldsource=number,
+ final]
+ \step[fieldset=sortkey,
+ origfieldval]
+ }
+ \map[overwrite=false]{
\pertype{audio}
\pertype{music}
\pertype{movie}
@@ -3973,8 +4327,8 @@
}
}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions
- [proceedings,report,audio,music,movie,video,manuscript,unpublished,review]%
- {useeditor=false}
+ [proceedings,report,artwork,audio,image,music,movie,performance,video,%
+ manuscript,unpublished,review]{useeditor=false}
%%
%% Copyright (C) 2016–2018 Alex Ball
%%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.bbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxyear.bbx}
[\Version\space Author-year bibliography style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
@@ -26,8 +26,25 @@
{Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
{Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
+\DeclareTypeOption{mergedate}[true]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx at opt@mergedate@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx at opt@mergedate@#1}}
+ {\PackageError{biblatex}
+ {Invalid option 'mergedate=#1'}
+ {Valid values are 'maximum', 'compact', 'basic', 'minimum',\MessageBreak
+ 'year', 'true' (=year), and 'false'.}}}
\providebibmacro*{date+extradate}{}
\DeclareFieldFormat{datelabel}{\mkbibparens{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labeldate}{%
+ \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \def\currentfield{date}%
+ }{%
+ \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+ \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}date}%
+ }{%
+ \def\currentfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}%
+ \iffieldannotation{inferred}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{#1}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
\DeclareLabeldate{%
\field{origdate}
\field{date}
@@ -56,50 +73,62 @@
\ifboolexpr{%
not test {\iffieldundef{labeldatesource}}
and test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{pubstate}}}}
+\newtoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareTypeOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\DeclareEntryOption[boolean]{nonodate}[true]{%
+ \settoggle{blx at ox@nonodate}{#1}}
+\newbibmacro*{labeldate}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+ and
+ togl {blx at ox@nonodate}
+ }{}{\printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at true{\bbx at opt@mergedate at year}
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at maximum{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{%
- \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{%
\printfield{issue}\clearfield{issue}%
\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printdateextra
- \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ \printdateextra}%
+ \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ }{%
+ \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{%
+ \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
}{%
- \iflabeldateisanydate{%
- \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
- }{%
- \printlabeldateextra
- \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
- }}}}}}
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+ \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at compact{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{%
- \iflabeldateisdate{%
- \printdateextra
- \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ \iflabeldateisdate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{\printdateextra}%
+ \clearfield{year}\clearfield{season}\clearfield{month}\clearfield{day}%
+ }{%
+ \iflabeldateisanydate{%
+ \printtext[datelabel]{%
+ \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
+ \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
}{%
- \iflabeldateisanydate{%
- \csuse{print\thefield{labeldatesource}dateextra}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}year}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}season}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}month}%
- \clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}day}%
- }{%
- \printlabeldateextra
- \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
- }}}}}}
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
+ \iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}}}}}}
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at year{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisdate{%
\clearfield{year}
}{%
@@ -111,7 +140,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at basic{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisdate{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -129,7 +158,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at minimum{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisdate{%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\ifdateshavedifferentprecision{label}{}}
@@ -153,7 +182,7 @@
\def\bbx at opt@mergedate at false{%
\renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
\iffieldundef{labelyear}{}{%
- \printtext[datelabel]{\printlabeldateextra}%
+ \usebibmacro{labeldate}%
\iflabeldateisanydate{}{%
\iflabeldateispubstate{}{\clearfield{\thefield{labeldatesource}}}%
}}}}
@@ -411,9 +440,17 @@
test {\iffieldundef{month}}
}%
}{}{}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[online,image]{citetitle}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[bookinbook]{citetitle}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{poem}}
+ or
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{play}}
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+ image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
\def\currentfield{title}%
\ifboolexpr{
test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
@@ -424,6 +461,72 @@
)
}{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
\undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[suppperiodical,inaudio,inmusic,inmovie,invideo,online,%
+ image,manuscript,unpublished]{citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[audio,music]{citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{podcast}{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[movie,video]{citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{episode}}
+ or
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{clip}}
+ or
+ test {\iffieldequalstr{entrysubtype}{webcast}}
+ }{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}}}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[legislation,legal]{citetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[misc]%
+ {citetitle}{%
+ \def\currentfield{title}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldannotation{descriptor}}
+ or (
+ test {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{title}}
+ )
+ }{#1}{%
+ \iffieldequalstr{relatedtype}{in}{%
+ \mkbibquote{#1\isdot}%
+ }{%
+ \mkbibemph{#1}%
+ }}%
+ \undef\currentfield}
\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{%
\ifboolexpr{
@@ -438,10 +541,6 @@
\addcomma\space
}%
}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[manuscript]{datelabel}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[unpublished]{datelabel}{%
- \iftoggle{blx at ox@ms}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}{\mkbibparens{#1}}}
-\renewbibmacro*{manuscript:date}{\usebibmacro{date}}
\DeclareLabeltitle{%
\field{shorttitle}
\field{title}
@@ -448,6 +547,25 @@
\field{maintitle}
\field{library}
}
+\DeclareStyleSourcemap{%
+ \maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+ \map[overwrite=true]{
+ \step[notmatch=\regexp{nonodate}, fieldsource=options, final]
+ \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+ \step[fieldset=options, append, fieldvalue={,nonodate}]
+ }
+ \map[overwrite=true]{
+ \step[notfield=options, final]
+ \step[fieldsource=sortyear, final]
+ \step[fieldset=options, fieldvalue={nonodate}]
+ }
+ \map[overwrite=false]{
+ \pertype{standard}
+ \step[notfield=author,
+ fieldsource=number,
+ fieldtarget=label]
+ }
+}}
%%
%% Copyright (C) 2016–2018 Alex Ball
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.cbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,22 +13,20 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxyear.cbx}
[\Version\space Author-year citation style inspired by the Oxford Guide to Style]
\RequireCitationStyle{authoryear-comp}
\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{uniquename=init}
-\xpatchbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
- \printfield{labelendyear}%
-}{%
- \iffieldundef{extradate}{%
- \blx at ox@compyear
- {\thefield{labelyear}}%
- {\thefield{labelendyear}}%
- }{%
- \printfield{labelendyear}}%
-}{}{}
+\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
+ or
+ ( test {\iffieldequalstr{labeldatesource}{nodate}}
+ and
+ togl {blx at ox@nonodate} )
+ }{}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
\xpatchbibmacro{cite}{%
\printnames{labelname}%
}{%
@@ -52,6 +50,7 @@
\iflabeldateisanydate
{\addspace}%
{\addcomma\space}}
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\compcitedelim}{\addsemicolon\space}
\renewcommand*{\postnotedelim}{\addcolon\space}
\xpatchbibmacro{textcite}{%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx 2018-03-05 22:15:52 UTC (rev 46851)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-oxref/oxyear.dbx 2018-03-05 22:20:02 UTC (rev 46852)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
%% See: http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%% ----------------------------------------------------------------
%%
-\def\Version{2018/02/09 v0.11.3}
+\def\Version{2018/03/03 v0.12}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01]
\ProvidesFile{oxyear.dbx}
[\Version\space Data model for the Oxref family of styles]
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list